*** empty log message ***
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
404fa7d6
DL
1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 5 Jan 2000
2Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
6For older news, see the file ONEWS.
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
1fa28578
GM
11** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
12the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
13
14** There are new configure options associated with the support for
15images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option to list them.
16\f
17* Changes in Emacs 21.1
18
a1b8d58b
GM
19** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
20
6e417ca5
DL
21** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
22been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
23
5898e075
DL
24** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
25`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
26indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
27indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
28
abfcc168
GM
29** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
30sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 31(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
32You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
33
cc181e95
GM
34** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
35on the display using several methods
36
37- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
38a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
39be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
40
41- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
42equivalent ot specifying the frame parameter.
43
da4496b6 44- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
45
46- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
47the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
48
0daee095 49** The new command `clone-buffer-indirectly' can be used to create
1c459486
GM
50an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
51command `clone-buffer-indirectly-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
52does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 53
176256a1 54** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
55`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
56typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 57
dd0add8e
DL
58** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
59characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
60
699238d9
GM
61** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
62compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
63this behavior.
64
65The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
66compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
67Emacs dump core.
68
69** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 70
7233c5bd
GM
71*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
72whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
73is useful for debugging X problems.
74
75Example:
76
699238d9 77 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 78
100b3cbb
GM
79*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
80visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
81the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
82and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
83visual class names are
84
85 TrueColor
86 PseudoColor
87 DirectColor
88 StaticColor
89 GrayScale
90 StaticGray
91
92Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
93`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
94meaning.
95
96The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
97supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
98`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
99visual.
100
101Example:
102
699238d9 103 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
104
105*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
106specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
107default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
108resource values are `true' or `on'.
109
110Example:
111
699238d9 112 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 113
0d0c76b8
EZ
114** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
115more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
116now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
117
42088c12 118** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 119display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
120shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
121be customized.
c60ea02e 122
31047e0d
DL
123** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
124
b02786f9
GM
125** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
126all frames except the selected one.
127
3261c1d8
DL
128** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
129to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
130
ffe36136
GM
131** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
132the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X either in the echo
133area or with tooltips.
134
559cee90
DL
135** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
136read mail from the menu etc.
137
271b4185
GM
138** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
139a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
140
0daee095
GM
141** Changes in Texinfo mode.
142
143** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
144macros
145
146 Key binding Macro
147 -------------------------
148 C-c C-c C-s @strong
149 C-c C-c C-e @emph
150 C-c C-c u @url
151 C-c C-c q @quotation
152 C-c C-c m @email
153
559cee90
DL
154** Changes in Outline mode.
155
156There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
157`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
158the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
159
404fa7d6
DL
160** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
161groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
162
8964fec7
SM
163** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either M-x clone-buffer
164or C-u m <entry> RET. M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and
165several other special buffers.
166
39783d73
WP
167** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
168under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
169.emacs file.
170
171The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
172determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
173
d35fce81
GM
174** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
175abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
176`directory-abbrev-alist'.
177
df5a1902
GM
178** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
179is running in batch mode. For example,
180
181 (message "%s" (read t))
182
183will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
184to standard output.
185
a933dad1
DL
186** Faces and frame parameters.
187
188There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
189Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
190`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
191`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
192sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
193for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
194parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
195
196Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
197`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 198`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
199`default' face and vice versa.
200
f77a4a8a
GM
201** New face `menu'.
202
203The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
204Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
205attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
206
a933dad1
DL
207** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
208
209The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
210colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
211correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
212the screen gamma of a frame's display.
213
214PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
215in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
216color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
217
218The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
219`ScreenGamma'.
220
221** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
222
223The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
224Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
225oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
226of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
227the text.
228
229** Emacs has a new face implementation.
230
231The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
232font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
233height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
234These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
235specify a font.
236
237Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
238These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
239under Lisp changes, below.
240
241** New default font is Courier 12pt.
242
243** When using a windowing terminal, Emacs window now has a cursor of
244its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid; otherwise,
245it is hollow.
246
247** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
248truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
249foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
250customizing face `fringe'.
251
252** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
253can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
254
255** LessTif support.
256
257Emacs now runs with LessTif (see <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will
258need a version 0.88.1 or later.
259
260** Toolkit scroll bars.
261
262Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
263LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
264configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
265bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
266bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
267Emacs.
268
269When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
270Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
271Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
272Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
273define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
274`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
275
276Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
277a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
278directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
279different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
280system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
281add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
282
283The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
284`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
285This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
286image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
287Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
288
289** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
290
291When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
292widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
293Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
294
295** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
296
297When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
298whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
299defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
300highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
301displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
302whitespace.
303
304** Busy-cursor.
305
306Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
307display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
308
309** Blinking cursor
310
311M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
312terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
313and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
314the group `cursor'.
315
316** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
317
318This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
319generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
320See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
321details.
322
323Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
324have to do anything to activate it.
325
326** Tabs and variable-width text.
327
328Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
329defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
330independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
331Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
332
333** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
334
335*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
336
337 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
338
79dd1637
RS
339The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
340LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 341
79dd1637
RS
342*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
343LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1
DL
344
345** Hscrolling in C code.
346
cc181e95
GM
347Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
348`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
349customized.
a933dad1
DL
350
351** Tool bar support.
352
353Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
354how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes.
355
356** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
357
358Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
359mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
360line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
361about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
362in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
363
364Currently, the following actions have been defined:
365
366- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
367buffers.
368
369- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
370M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
371
372- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
373
559cee90 374- Mouse-2 on the read-only status in the mode line (`%' or `*')
a933dad1
DL
375toggles the read-only status.
376
377- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
378
379** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
380
381When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 382from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
383non-nil.
384
385** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
386
387Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
388Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
389the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
390italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
391Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
392attributes like overlines, strike-throught, box are ignored.
393
394** Sound support
395
396Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
397(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
398Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
399(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
400to enable sound support.
401
402** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
403the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
404forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
405value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
406users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
407even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
408
409The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
410
411** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
412
413As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
414drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
415`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
416
417** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
418bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
419
420This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
421`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
422variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
423
424** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
425
426When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
427value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
428number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
429fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
430
431When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
432value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
433number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
434fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
435
436** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
437notably at the end of lines.
438
439All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
440spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
441
eee54b0e
DL
442There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
443
a933dad1
DL
444** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
445query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
446after each match to get the replacement text.
447
f0124b4a 448** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `E' that lets you
4ff40dd0
GM
449edit the replacement string.
450
451** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', let's
452you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
453lisp-complete-symbol.
454
a933dad1
DL
455** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
456
457If a message is longer than one line, or mini-buffer contents are
458longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the mini-window unless it is
459on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum mini-window size
460by setting the following variable:
461
462- User option: max-mini-window-height
463
464Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
465fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
466specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize.
467
468Default is 0.25.
469
0d43b60d
GM
470** Changes to hideshow.el
471
472Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
473selection and traversal and includes more isearch support.
474
475*** Generalized block selection and traversal
476
477A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
478(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
479which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
480`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
481point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
482(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
483
484If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
485i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
486backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
487the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
488
489*** Isearch support for updating mode line
490
491During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
492blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
493line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
494portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
495is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
496
497To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
498something like this in your .emacs.
499
500 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
501 (lambda ()
502 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
503
559cee90
DL
504** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
505
506If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes an
507entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
508log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
509
510New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the current
511buffer, fixing old-style date formats if necessary.
eb2aac9d
GM
512
513Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log entries
514if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
515
516The search for a file's version number is performed based on regular
517expressions from `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be
518cutomized. Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of
519a file.
520
3476b54a
GM
521** Changes in Font Lock
522
523*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
524font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major
525mode.
526
b3b98592
GM
527** Comint (subshell) changes
528
529Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
530and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
531
532The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
533buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
534buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
535
536The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
537M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
538the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
539
e26cec67
GM
540** Changes to Rmail mode
541
c0510d27
GM
542*** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
543set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
544receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
545recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
546`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
547as correspondent.
548
549Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
550mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
551regexp matching your mail adresses.
552
3b55acc9
GM
553*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
554to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
555Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
556with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
557for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
558
6a1950ec
GM
559*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
560like `j'.
561
5bb6f079
RS
562*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
563specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 564digest message.
e26cec67 565
400a1ed0
GM
566** Changes to TeX mode
567
568The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
569`latex-mode'.
570
a933dad1
DL
571** Changes to RefTeX mode
572
573*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
574 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
575 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
576 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
577 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
578 can be edited from that buffer.
579
580*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
581 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
582 `A' to use all marked entries).
583
584*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
585 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
586
587*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
588 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
589 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
590 been cited.
591
38de9631
GM
592** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
593The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
594semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
595in column 1 are always made leaves.
596
a933dad1
DL
597** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
598has the following new features:
599
600*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
601may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
602to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
603time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
604
605*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
606feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
607file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
608compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
609pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
610defaults to 1.
611
612** Tooltips.
613
614Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
615mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
616can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
617
618Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
619variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
620the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
621tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
622
623** Customize changes
624
625*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
626`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
627cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
628
629*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
630Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
631default).
632
0ae51efb
GM
633*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
634between custom options. Example:
635
636 (defcustom default-input-method nil
637 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
638 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
639 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
640 :group 'mule
641 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
642 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
643
644This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
645current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
646first in a custom-set-variables statement.
647
a933dad1
DL
648** New features in evaluation commands
649
650The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
651modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
652print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
653customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
654eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
655
a933dad1
DL
656** Dired changes
657
658*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
659command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
660is, delete only empty directories.
661
662*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
663command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
664copy directories recursively.
665
f6737cde
GM
666*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
667in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
668the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
669
a933dad1
DL
670** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
671use the -f option when sending mail.
672
b1c609b1
GM
673** CC mode changes.
674
675Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
676current user setups (although it's believed that these
677incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
678However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
679back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
680compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
681release.
682
683*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
684When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
685variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
686take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
687is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
688settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
689possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
690Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
691
692By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
693special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
694the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
695of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
696above.
697
698Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
699when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
700function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
701call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
702then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
703values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
704only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
705function documentation for more info.
706
707The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
708especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
709with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
710intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
711such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
712is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
713configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
714global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
715
716(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
717
718**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
719This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
720
721This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
722variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
723completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
724the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
725empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
726style system.
727
728**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
729In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
730c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
731as far as possible.
732
733*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
734CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
735surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
736chapter about this in the manual.
737
738**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
739The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
740recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
741primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
742adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
743
744**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
745This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
746c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
747
748**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
749This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
750
751It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
752Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
753A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
754inside CC Mode.
755
756Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
757causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
758the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
759available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
760cc-mode/).
761
762**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
763The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
764specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
765literals.
766
767**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
768It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
769prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
770you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
771this function.
772
773*** Fixes to IDL mode.
774It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
775to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
776struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
777Thanks to Eric Eide.
778
779*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
780It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
781opening braces hangs and when they don't.
782
783**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
784
785*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
786See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
787better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
788and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
789
790*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
791previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
792the column specified by comment-column.
793
794*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
795In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
796is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
797prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
798contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
799don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
800
801*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
802instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
803arguments.
804
805*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
806
807*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
808c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
809c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
810variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
811Provan).
812
813*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
814
c407c570
GM
815** Makefile mode changes
816
817*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
818
819*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
820Fontlock mode is active.
821
87be76f6
GM
822** Isearch changes
823
c407c570
GM
824** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
825respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
826that started the search.
827
87be76f6 828*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
829selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
830
87be76f6
GM
831*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
832
d35fce81 833Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
834`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
835search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
836before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
837highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
838`secondary-selection'.
839
840The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
841will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
842Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
843using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
844usual snappy response.
845
846If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
847matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
848set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
849isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
850
35384f06
GM
851** Changes in sort.el
852
853The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 854as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
35384f06
GM
855new user-option sort-numberic-base can be used to specify a default
856numeric base.
87be76f6 857
d7b511c4
GM
858** Changes to Ange-ftp
859
860*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
861names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
862sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
863
d7b511c4
GM
864*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
865ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
866
4b9347b3
GM
867** Shell script mode changes.
868
869Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
870derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
871sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
872
79214ddf
FP
873** Etags changes.
874
875*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
876
aca0be23 877*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
878possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
879{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
880This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
881a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 882
79214ddf
FP
883*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
884declarations when given the --declarations option.
885
886*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 887"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
888
889*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
890types.
891
892*** In Fortran, procedure is no more tagged.
893
894*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
895
896*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
897are now tagged.
898
899*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
900variables are tagged.
901
902*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
903
8dc78b52
FP
904*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
905for PSWrap.
79214ddf 906
f6737cde
GM
907** Changes in etags.el
908
3f6e4b8b
GM
909*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
910tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
911is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
912
f6737cde
GM
913*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
914the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
915
916If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
917FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
918TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
919obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
920
921TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
922
923FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
924List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
925
926A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
927
928 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
929 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
930 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
931
932*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
933of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
934
935*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
936names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
937
fbc164de
PE
938** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
939and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
940LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
941
59c1bf85
DL
942** New language environments `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
943These correspond respectively to the ISO character sets 8859-14
944(Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign). There is
945currently no specific input method support for them.
946
e33b0397
DL
947** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sqeuence-nos' to
948remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
949appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
950
951** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
952
6f8ea2ae
DL
953** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
954
c0510d27
GM
955** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignore-regexps'
956containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
957expression from that list, are not checked.
958
a933dad1
DL
959** New modes and packages
960
578979ee
GM
961*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
962facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
963separate Texinfo file.
964
dc1178bf
SM
965*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine
966or by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
967provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS.
968It comes with log-view-mode to view RCS and SCCS logs and log-edit-mode
969used to enter checkin log messages.
970
6abca616
EZ
971*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
972without invoking external programs.
973
974The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
975and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
976`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
977is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
978Groff or `troff' are not readily available.
979
980The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
981page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
982
5e5dff44
GM
983*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
984authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
985
986The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
987the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
988the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
989Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
990even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
991single step.
992
993On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
994matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
995probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
996contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
997
f7136ee8
GM
998*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
999unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1000actually modifying content of a buffer.
1001
bbd9b566
GM
1002*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1003PostScript.
1004
1005Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1006
1007The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1008
1009 ; comment (until end of line)
1010 A non-terminal
1011 "C" terminal
1012 ?C? special
1013 $A default non-terminal
1014 $"C" default terminal
1015 $?C? default special
1016 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1017 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1018 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1019 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1020 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1021 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1022 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1023 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1024 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1025 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1026 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1027 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1028 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1029 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1030 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1031
1032Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1033
99453a38
GM
1034*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1035align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1036determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1037example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1038equal signs of assignments.
1039
559cee90
DL
1040*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1041paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1042
6448a6b3
GM
1043*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1044list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1045buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1046customize the package.
1047
249652b1
GM
1048*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1049replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1050is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1051and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1052not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1053which answers different needs.
1054
3476b54a
GM
1055*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1056suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1057expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1058course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1059reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1060to be enabled.
1061
8964fec7
SM
1062*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1063containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1064
a933dad1
DL
1065*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1066
1067*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1068
1069*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1070
1071*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1072Pascal) language.
1073
1074*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1075the text at point.
1076
1077*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1078
8d54eb69
DL
1079*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1080
a933dad1
DL
1081*** whitespace.el ???
1082
ebcfda83
GM
1083*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1084files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1085(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1086interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1087often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1088uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1089codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1090
1091*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1092
1093Here is an example of columns:
1094
1095horse apple bus
1096dog pineapple car EXTRA
1097porcupine strawberry airplane
1098
1099Doing the following settings:
1100
1101 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1102 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1103 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1104 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1105
1106
1107Selecting the lines above and typing:
1108
1109 M-x delimit-columns-region
1110
1111It results:
1112
1113[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1114[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1115[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1116
1117delim-col has the following options:
1118
1119 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1120 before all columns.
1121
1122 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1123 between each column.
1124
1125 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1126 after all columns.
1127
1128 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1129 each column.
1130
1131delim-col has the following commands:
1132
1133 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1134 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1135
f507826c
GM
1136*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
1137were operated on recently. When enabled, a new "Open Recent" submenu
1138is displayed in the "Files" menu.
1139
1140The recent files list is automatically saved across Emacs sessions.
1141
1142To enable/disable recentf use M-x recentf-mode.
1143
1144To enable recentf at Emacs startup use
1145M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET.
1146
1147To change the number of recent files displayed and others options use
1148M-x customize-group RET recentf RET.
1149
8062f458
DL
1150*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1151text.
1152
36e24b82 1153*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1154of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1155specific to Message mode.
1156
36e24b82
DL
1157*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1158viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1159with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1160
aaa659ef
DL
1161*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1162interface to access directory servers using different directory
1163protocols. It has a separate manual.
1164
eee54b0e
DL
1165*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1166for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1167
612839b6
GM
1168*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1169
1170*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
1171minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1172
399da7e3
DL
1173*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1174with the diary features.
1175
6e417ca5
DL
1176*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
1177numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
1178
a933dad1
DL
1179** Withdrawn packages
1180
1181*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1182functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1183
3261c1d8
DL
1184*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1185
1186*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
a933dad1
DL
1187\f
1188* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
1189
1190Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1191--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1192When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1193so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1194
399da7e3 1195+++
f0124b4a
DL
1196** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
1197that offset in the file before writing.
1198
3bbc50af
DL
1199** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, as
1200promised long ago.
1201
7464346d
GM
1202** The function `add-minor-mode' simplifies the definition of minor
1203modes.
1204
c94f4677 1205- Function: add-minor-mode TOGGLE NAME &optional KEYMAP AFTER TOGGLE-FUN
7464346d 1206
c94f4677
GM
1207Register a new minor mode.
1208
1209TOGGLE is a symbol which is the name of a buffer-local variable that
1210is toggled on or off to say whether the minor mode is active or not.
1211
1212NAME specifies what will appear in the mode line when the minor mode
1213is active. NAME should be either a string starting with a space, or a
1214symbol whose value is such a string.
1215
1216Optional KEYMAP is the keymap for the minor mode that will be added
1217to `minor-mode-map-alist'.
1218
1219Optional AFTER specifies that TOGGLE should be added after AFTER
1220in `minor-mode-alist'.
1221
1222Optional TOGGLE-FUN is there for compatiblity with other Emacssen.
1223It is currently not used.
7464346d 1224
612839b6
GM
1225** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
1226`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
1227from which the command was issued.
1228
1229** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
1230`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
1231`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
1232additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
1233operate on.
1234
271b4185
GM
1235** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
1236to `window-buffer-height'.
1237
1238- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
1239
1240Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
1241The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
1242lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
1243
1244Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
1245respectively.
1246
1247If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
1248COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
1249
1250The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
1251obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
1252on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
1253
1254Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
1255buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
1256possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
1257is currently displayed in some window.
1258
3c30cb6e
DL
1259** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
1260argument function's results.
1261
62f20204
GM
1262** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
1263signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
1264
c0510d27
GM
1265** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
1266header is the list of headers passed to it.
1267
1268** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
1269ignores differences in case and text representation.
1270
1271** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
1272cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
1273as follows:
1274
1275 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
1276 nil don't display a cursor
1277 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
1278 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
1279 others display a box cursor.
1280
9a0dd3dc
GM
1281** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
1282an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
1283defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
1284set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
1285
d7b511c4 1286** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 1287specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
1288the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
1289text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
1290
1291Example:
1292
1293 (string-to-syntax "()")
1294 => (4 . 41)
1295
1fa28578
GM
1296** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
1297other than 10.
1298
1299*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
1300INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
1301
1302 #b1111
1303 => 15
1304 #b-1111
1305 => -15
1306
1307*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
1308
1309 #o666
1310 => 438
1311
1312*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
1313
1314 #xbeef
1315 => 48815
1316
1317*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
1318
1319 #2R-111
1320 => -7
1321 #25rah
1322 => 267
1323
3d4ff2dd 1324** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
e9b4e5ff
GM
1325the given property to obtain a a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
1326and isn't a string.
1327
3d4ff2dd
GM
1328** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
1329a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
1330value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
1331not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
1332
16ce590d
DL
1333+++
1334** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
1335
73825616 1336** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
1337for a regexp in a string.
1338
1339** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
1340`mouse-position-function'.
1341
723e779c
GM
1342** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
1343that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
1344
d1e103b2
GM
1345** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
1346Keywords are now always considered constants.
1347
31047e0d
DL
1348+++
1349** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
1350returns it.
1351
7a85e4df
GM
1352** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
1353returned by function `recent-keys'.
1354
02b14400
RS
1355+++
1356** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
1357can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
1358Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
1359etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
1360mode.
404fa7d6 1361
02b14400 1362+++
8964fec7
SM
1363** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
1364and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
1365
02b14400
RS
1366+++
1367** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
1368has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
1369function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
1370returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
1371been performed."
1372
1373When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
1374and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
1375hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
1376then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 1377
02b14400 1378+++
81da8b32
GM
1379** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
1380In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
1381and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
1382
02b14400 1383+++
9e207b90
GM
1384** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
1385with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
1386specified table.
1387
1388 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
1389
1390Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
1391TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
1392saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
1393what BODY returns.
9e207b90 1394
02b14400 1395+++
d7f89643 1396** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 1397Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8964fec7 1398
02b14400 1399+++
dde9e75a
GM
1400** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
1401removed since it wasn't used by anything.
1402
02b14400 1403+++
9da30515
GM
1404** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
1405instead of being optional.
1406
02b14400 1407+++
d20679eb
GM
1408** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
1409modify read-only text.
1410
02b14400 1411+++
fbc164de
PE
1412** New functions and variables for locales.
1413
1414The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
1415decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
1416time functions like strftime. The new variables
1417`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
1418locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
1419
1420The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
1421environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
1422the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
1423environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
1424not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
1425`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
1426`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 1427
02b14400 1428+++
863476d1
SM
1429** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
1430To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
1431modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
1432start sequences.
1433
02b14400 1434+++
ef6d912c
GM
1435** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
1436because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
1437
02b14400 1438+++
a933dad1
DL
1439** New function `propertize'
1440
1441The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
1442strings with text properties.
1443
1444- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
1445
1446Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
1447by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
1448PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
1449specified value of that property. Example:
1450
1451 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
1452
1453+++
1454** push and pop macros.
1455
02b14400
RS
1456Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
1457are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
1458as the place that holds the list to be changed.
1459
1460(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
1461(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
1462 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
1463
02b14400
RS
1464** New dolist and dotimes macros.
1465
6c7fd5aa
RS
1466Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
1467are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
1468
1469(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
1470 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
1471 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
1472 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1473
1474(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
1475 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
1476 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
1477 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1478
a933dad1
DL
1479+++
1480** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
1481as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
1482
1483[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
1484[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
1485[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
1486[:blank:] matches space and tab only
1487[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
1488 space, and DEL.
1489[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
1490 and DEL.
1491[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
1492 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1493 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1494[:alpha:] matches letters.
1495 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1496 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1497[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
1498[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
1499[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
1500[:punct:] matches punctuation.
1501 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1502 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
1503[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
1504[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
1505[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
1506
1507+++
1508** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
1509
1510The following functions are defined for hash tables:
1511
1512- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
1513
1514The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
1515are optional. The following arguments are defined:
1516
1517:test TEST
1518
1519TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
1520Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
1521it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
1522
1523:size SIZE
1524
1525SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
1526many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
1527
1528:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
1529
1530REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
1531full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
1532size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
15331.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
1534old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
1535
1536:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
1537
1538THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
1539hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
1540(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
1541
1542:weakness WEAK
1543
1544WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', or t.
1545Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage collection if
1546their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere outside of the
1547hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
1548
1549- Function: makehash &optional TEST
1550
1551Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
1552
1553- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
1554
1555Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
1556
1557- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
1558
1559Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
1560values are shared.
1561
1562- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
1563
1564Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
1565
1566- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
1567
1568Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
1569
1570- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
1571
1572Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
1573
1574- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
1575
1576Returns the size of TABLE.
1577
1578- Function: hash-table-rehash-test TABLE
1579
1580Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
1581
1582- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
1583
1584Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
1585
1586- Function: clrhash TABLE
1587
1588Clear TABLE.
1589
1590- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
1591
1592Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
1593not found.
1594
79214ddf 1595- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
1596
1597Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
1598another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
1599
1600- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
1601
1602Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
1603
1604- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
1605
1606Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
1607arguments KEY and VALUE.
1608
1609- Function: sxhash OBJ
1610
1611Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
1612
1613- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
1614
1615Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
1616a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 1617comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
1618and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
1619of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
1620
1621TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
1622
1623HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
1624code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
1625integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
1626
1627Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
1628be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
1629
1630 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
1631 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
1632
1633 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
1634 (sxhash (upcase a)))
1635
79214ddf 1636 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
1637 'case-fold-string-hash))
1638
1639 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
1640
1641+++
1642** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
1643
1644It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
1645circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
1646a cons cell which is its own cdr.
1647
1648+++
1649** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
1650
1651If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
1652#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
1653
a933dad1
DL
1654+++
1655** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
1656t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
1657specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
1658is too short to reach that column.
1659
1660+++
1661** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
1662now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
1663after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
1664two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
1665
1666If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
1667perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
1668and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
1669
1670+++
1671** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
1672to specify which buffer to return the size of.
1673
1674+++
1675** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
1676calendar-move-hook after moving point.
1677
1678+++
1679** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
1680directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
1681small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
1682small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
1683temporary-file-directory instead.
1684
1685+++
1686** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
1687the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
1688`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
1689hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
1690
1691+++
1692** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
1693elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
1694
1695+++
1696** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
1697
1698make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
1699creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
1700ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
1701
1702+++
1703** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
1704
1705The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
1706on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
1707is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
1708never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
1709ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
1710overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
1711
1712If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
1713that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
1714to get an error if the file exists at that time.
1715The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
1716
1717+++
1718** Function `format' now handles text properties.
1719
1720Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
1721If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
1722ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
1723result string.
1724
1725Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
1726string where arguments appear in the result string.
1727
1728Example:
1729
1730 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
1731 (s2 "world"))
1732 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
1733 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 1734 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
1735
1736results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
1737
1738+++
1739** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
1740
1741Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
1742The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
1743argument in it.
1744
1745 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
1746 (arg "world"))
1747 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
1748 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
1749 (message msg arg))
1750
1751+++
1752** Sound support
1753
1754Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
1755(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
1756
1757Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
1758(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
1759to enable sound support.
1760
1761Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
1762list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
1763when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
1764functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
1765sound to play, before playing the sound.
1766
1767The following sound properties are supported:
1768
1769- `:file FILE'
1770
1771FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
1772searched relative to `data-directory'.
1773
6fb40beb
GM
1774- `:data DATA'
1775
1776DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
1777may be present, but not both.
1778
a933dad1
DL
1779- `:volume VOLUME'
1780
1781VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
17820..1. This property is optional.
1783
1784Other properties are ignored.
1785
1786** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4
DL
1787
1788** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
1789a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
1790
1791** Changes to garbage collection
1792
1793*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
1794of live and free strings.
1795
1796*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
1797strings that have been consed so far.
1798
a933dad1
DL
1799\f
1800* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
1801
1802Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1803--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1804When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1805so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1806
f6d3257b
GM
1807** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
1808to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
1809
1810Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
1811text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
1812is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
1813your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
1814laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
1815just display it black instead.
1816
1817This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
1818a line like
1819
1820 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
1821
1822in your `.emacs'.
1823
a933dad1
DL
1824** New face implementation.
1825
1826Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
1827font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
1828
1829+++
1830*** New faces.
1831
1832Each face can specify the following display attributes:
1833
1834 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 1835
a933dad1
DL
1836 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
1837 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 1838
a933dad1 1839 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 1840
a933dad1 1841 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 1842
a933dad1 1843 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 1844
a933dad1 1845 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 1846
a933dad1
DL
1847 7. Background color.
1848
1849 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
1850
1851 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
1852
1853 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
1854
1855 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
1856
1857 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
1858 color.
1859
1860 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
1861 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
1862
1863Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
1864same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
1865frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
1866faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
1867with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
1868attributes mentioned above.
1869
1870There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
1871definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
1872created frames.
79214ddf 1873
a933dad1
DL
1874A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
1875have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
1876`fully-specified'.
1877
1878+++
1879*** Face merging.
1880
1881The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
1882combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
1883aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
1884properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
1885that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
1886results in a fully-specified face.
1887
1888+++
1889*** Face realization.
1890
1891After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
1892merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
1893realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
1894available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
1895face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
1896cache of the frame on which it was realized.
1897
1898Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
1899character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
1900for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
1901charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
1902
1903Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
1904specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
1905being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
1906the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
1907statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
1908
1909In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
1910`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
19110x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
1912the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
1913initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
1914Emacs.
1915
1916Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
1917`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
1918registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
1919with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
1920
1921++++
1922**** Clearing face caches.
1923
1924The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
1925on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
1926unused fonts.
1927
1928+++
1929*** Font selection.
79214ddf 1930
a933dad1
DL
1931Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
1932given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
1933for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
1934
1935If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
1936pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
1937family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
1938property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
1939an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
1940
1941Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
1942against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
1943match for the given face attributes in this font list.
1944
1945Font selection can be influenced by the user.
1946
1947The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
1948attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
1949face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
1950names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
1951that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
1952width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
1953to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
1954
1955Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to
1956specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a
1957face doesn't exist.
1958
1959+++
1960**** Scalable fonts
1961
1962Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
1963since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
1964servers.
1965
1966To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 1967`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
1968scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
1969Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
1970scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
1971that list. Example:
1972
1973 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
1974
1975allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
1976
1977+++
1978*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
1979
1980- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
1981
1982Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
1983is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
1984string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
1985
1986If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
1987the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
1988FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
1989POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
1990SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
1991These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
1992if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
1993REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
1994the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
1995of the face font sort order.
1996
79214ddf 1997- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
1998
1999Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
2000omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
2001(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
2002non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
2003
2004- Variable: font-list-limit
2005
2006Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
2007won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
2008matching font. The default is currently 100.
2009
2010+++
2011*** Setting face attributes.
2012
2013For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
2014with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
2015implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
2016`face-attribute'.
2017
2018Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
2019symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
2020
2021The following attributes are recognized:
2022
2023`:family'
2024
2025VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
2026or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
2027and `?' are allowed.
2028
2029`:width'
2030
2031VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
2032It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
2033`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
2034`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
2035
2036`:height'
2037
2038VALUE must be an integer specifying the height of the font to use in
20391/10 pt.
2040
2041`:weight'
2042
2043VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
2044symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
2045`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
2046
2047`:slant'
2048
2049VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
2050symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
2051`reverse-oblique'.
2052
2053`:foreground', `:background'
2054
2055VALUE must be a color name, a string.
2056
2057`:underline'
2058
2059VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
2060VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
2061a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
2062don't underline.
2063
2064`:overline'
2065
2066VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
2067VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
2068string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
2069overline.
2070
2071`:strike-through'
2072
2073VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
2074striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
2075face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
2076is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
2077
2078`:box'
2079
2080VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
2081around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
2082VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
2083of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
2084and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
2085VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
2086:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
2087the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
2088specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
2089defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
2090the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
2091color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
2092should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
2093like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
2094that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
2095the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
2096box.
2097
2098`:inverse-video'
2099
2100VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
2101inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
2102
2103`:stipple'
2104
2105If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
2106The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
2107searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
2108HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
2109is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
2110explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
2111
2112For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
2113and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
2114
2115`:font'
2116
2117Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
2118XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
2119is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
2120versions of Emacs.
2121
2122For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
2123be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
2124must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
2125
2126Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
2127`defface'.
2128
2129*** Face attributes and X resources
2130
2131The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
2132from X resources:
2133
2134 Face attribute X resource class
2135-----------------------------------------------------------------------
2136 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
2137 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
2138 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
2139 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
2140 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
2141 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
2142 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
2143 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
2144 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
2145 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
2146 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
2147 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
2148 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 2149 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
2150 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
2151 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2152 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
2153 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
2154 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2155
2156+++
2157*** Text property `face'.
2158
2159The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
2160specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
2161specification can be
2162
21631. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
2164
21652. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
2166 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
2167 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
2168 for face attribute names.
2169
21703. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
2171 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
2172 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
2173
2174+++
2175** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
2176
acf3ecb7
EZ
2177The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
2178on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
2179the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 2180default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 2181`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
2182used to clear the mapping table.
2183
acf3ecb7
EZ
2184** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
2185
2186The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
2187and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
2188type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
2189color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
2190display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
2191old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
2192`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
2193compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
2194should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
2195modify their color-related behavior.
2196
2197The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
2198any frame type.
2199
8a5719f0
EZ
2200** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
2201
2202The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
2203`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
2204`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
2205`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
2206`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
2207`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
2208display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
2209the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
2210platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
2211
a933dad1
DL
2212+++
2213** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 2214
463cac2d 2215This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
a933dad1
DL
2216
2217The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
2218end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
2219Otherwise, it returns zero.
2220
463cac2d
GM
2221** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
2222
2223There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
2224buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
2225text-property.
2226
9a9dfda8 2227Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 2228forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 2229to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 2230not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
2231commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
2232boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
2233`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
2234functions.
463cac2d
GM
2235
2236Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 2237a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 2238editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 2239
9a9dfda8
GM
2240The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
2241
2242- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE
2243
2244Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
2245A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2246If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
2247constrained position if that is is different.
2248
2249If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
2250positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
2251ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
2252constrained to the field that has the same `field' text-property
2253as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2254is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
2255fields.
2256
2257If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
2258NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
2259unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
2260C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
2261only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
2262
2263- Function: erase-field &optional POS
2264
2265Erases the field surrounding POS.
2266A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2267If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2268
2269- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2270
2271Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
2272A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2273If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2274If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at beginning of an
2275field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
2276
2277- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2278
2279Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
2280A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2281If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2282If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at end of a field,
2283then the end of the *following* field is returned.
2284
2285- Function: field-string &optional POS
2286
2287Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
2288A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2289If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2290
2291- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
2292
2293Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
2294A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2295If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2296
a933dad1
DL
2297+++
2298** Image support.
2299
2300Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
2301strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
2302(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
2303replaces the display of the characters having that property.
2304
2305If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
2306`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
2307AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
2308window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
2309area.
2310
2311IMAGE is an image specification.
2312
2313*** Image specifications
2314
2315Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
2316is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
2317specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
2318symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
2319described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
2320
2321The following is a list of properties all image types share.
2322
2323`:ascent ASCENT'
2324
576da55d
GM
2325ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
2326If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
2327to use for its ascent.
2328
2329If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
2330image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
2331
2332If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered with text drawn
2333in the same face as the image. The point the image is aligned with is
2334the middle of the height of the face's font. That point is usually
2335different from the font's base line.
a933dad1
DL
2336
2337`:margin MARGIN'
2338
79214ddf 2339MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
2340margin around the image. Default is 0.
2341
2342`:relief RELIEF'
2343
2344RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
2345around an image.
2346
2347`:algorithm ALGO'
2348
2349Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. ALGO must
2350be a symbol specifying the algorithm. Currently only `laplace' is
2351supported which applies a Laplace edge detection algorithm to an image
2352which is intended to display images "disabled."
2353
2354`:heuristic-mask BG'
2355
2356If BG is not nil, build a clipping mask for the image, so that the
2357background of a frame is visible behind the image. If BG is t,
2358determine the background color of the image by looking at the 4
2359corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from
2360the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must
2361be a list `(RED GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the
2362background of the image.
2363
2364`:file FILE'
2365
2366Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
2367search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
2368building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
2369may be present in the image specification.
2370
518df5c4
GM
2371`:data DATA'
2372
2373Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
2374supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
2375present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
2376support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
2377
a933dad1
DL
2378*** Supported image types
2379
b246b1f6 2380**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
2381
2382XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
2383properties supported are
2384
2385`:foreground FG'
2386
2387FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
2388is the frame's foreground.
2389
2390`:background FG'
2391
2392BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
2393the frame's background color.
2394
2395XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
2396case, the image specification must contain the following properties
2397instead of a `:file' property.
2398
2399`:width WIDTH'
2400
2401WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
2402
2403`:height HEIGHT'
2404
2405HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
2406
2407`:data DATA'
2408
2409DATA must be either
2410
2411 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
2412 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
2413
2414 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
2415
2416 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
2417 bitmap.
2418
c76e04a8
GM
2419 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
2420 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
2421 in the file.
2422
a933dad1
DL
2423**** XPM, image type `xpm'
2424
2425XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
2426`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
2427found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
2428`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
2429
2430Additional image properties supported are:
2431
2432`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
2433
2434SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
2435name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
2436name.
2437
2438XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
2439add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
2440
a933dad1
DL
2441The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
2442to display compressed images.
2443
2444**** PBM, image type `pbm'
2445
2446PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2447mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties
2448defined.
2449
2450**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
2451
2452Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
2453package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
2454are:
2455
a933dad1
DL
2456**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
2457
2458Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
2459package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
2460properties defined.
2461
2462**** GIF, image type `gif'
2463
2464Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
2465`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
2466
2467Additional image properties supported are:
2468
2469`:index INDEX'
2470
2471INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
2472multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
2473
2474This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
2475For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
2476at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
2477every 0.1 seconds.
2478
2479(defun show-anim (file max)
2480 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
2481 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
2482
2483(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
2484 (when (= idx max)
2485 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 2486 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
2487 (save-excursion
2488 (set-buffer buffer)
2489 (goto-char (point-min))
2490 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
2491 (insert-image img "x"))
2492 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
2493
2494**** PNG, image type `png'
2495
2496Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
2497package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
2498properties defined.
2499
2500**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
2501
2502Additional image properties supported are:
2503
2504`:pt-width WIDTH'
2505
2506WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 2507integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
2508
2509`:pt-height HEIGHT'
2510
2511HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 2512must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
2513
2514`:bounding-box BOX'
2515
2516BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
2517the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
2518files. This is an required property.
2519
2520Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
2521lisp/gs.el.
2522
2523*** Lisp interface.
2524
79214ddf
FP
2525The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
2526which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
2527
2528Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
2529they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
2530The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
2531manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
2532images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
2533
2534*** Simplified image API, image.el
2535
2536The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
2537creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
2538can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
2539define an image based on available image types. The functions
2540`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
2541buffer.
2542
2543+++
2544** Display margins.
2545
2546Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
2547and images.
2548
2549To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
2550`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
2551`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
2552obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
2553`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
2554the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
2555of the display margins.
2556
2557You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
2558containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
2559one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
2560string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
2561in this file).
2562
2563+++
2564** Help display
2565
2566Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
2567moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
2568`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
2569that have a `help-echo' property.
2570
2571The value of the `help-echo' property must be a string. For tool-bar
2572items, their key definition is used to determine the help to display.
2573If their definition contains a property `:help FORM', FORM is
2574evaluated to determine the help string. Otherwise, the caption of the
2575tool-bar item is used.
2576
2577The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
2578help differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window causes the
2579help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
2580
2581+++
2582** Vertical fractional scrolling.
2583
2584The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
2585This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
2586
2587The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
2588scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
2589The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
2590scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
2591used.
2592
79214ddf
FP
2593 (global-set-key [A-down]
2594 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 2595 (interactive)
79214ddf 2596 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 2597 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 2598 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
2599 #'(lambda ()
2600 (interactive)
79214ddf 2601 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
2602 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
2603
2604+++
2605** New hook `fontification-functions'.
2606
2607Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
2608when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
2609variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
2610is called with one argument, POS.
2611
2612At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
2613characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
2614as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
2615property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
2616`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
2617
2618+++
2619** Tool bar support.
2620
2621Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
2622parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
2623controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
2624suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
2625`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
2626automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
2627
2628*** Tool bar item definitions
2629
2630Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
2631`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
2632where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 2633
a933dad1
DL
2634CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
2635evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
2636the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
2637property (see below).
79214ddf 2638
a933dad1
DL
2639BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
2640binding are currently ignored.
2641
2642The following properties are recognized:
2643
2644`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 2645
a933dad1
DL
2646FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
2647or disabled.
79214ddf 2648
a933dad1 2649`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 2650
a933dad1 2651FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 2652
a933dad1
DL
2653`:filter FUNCTION'
2654
2655FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
2656FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
2657used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 2658
a933dad1
DL
2659`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
2660
2661TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
2662and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 2663
a933dad1
DL
2664`:image IMAGES'
2665
2666IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
2667image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
2668meaning of each of the four elements:
2669
2670 Index Use when item is
2671 ----------------------------------------
2672 0 enabled and selected
2673 1 enabled and deselected
2674 2 disabled and selected
2675 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 2676
a933dad1 2677`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 2678
a933dad1
DL
2679Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
2680is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
2681
2682*** Tool-bar-related variables.
2683
2684If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
2685resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
2686than 1/4 of the frame's size.
2687
79214ddf 2688If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
2689raised when the mouse moves over them.
2690
2691You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
2692`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
2693pixels. Default is 1.
2694
2695You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
2696`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
2697
2698*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
2699
2700You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 2701a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
2702
2703 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
2704 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
2705 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
2706
2707is the original tool bar item definition, then
2708
2709 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
2710
2711makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
2712item.
2713
2714** Mode line changes.
2715
2716+++
2717*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
2718
2719The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
2720that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
2721a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
2722
27231. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
2724a `local-map' text property.
2725
27262. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
2727that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
2728
27293. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
2730is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
2731`local-map' property.
2732
2733The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
2734properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
2735example.
2736
54522c9f
GM
2737*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
2738evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
2739
a933dad1
DL
2740+++
2741*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
2742variable mode-line-format to nil.
2743
2744+++
2745*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
2746
2747This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
2748`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
2749completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
2750`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
2751line.
2752
2753The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
2754`header-line'.
2755
2756The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
2757position in the header-line.
2758
2759+++
2760** Text property `display'
2761
2762The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, and
2763also control other aspects of how text displays. The value of the
2764`display' property should be a display specification, as described
2765below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
2766
2767*** Variable width and height spaces
2768
2769To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
2770specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
2771`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
2772area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
2773marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
2774displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
2775simpler form STRETCH as property value.
2776
2777The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
2778PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
2779properties described below.
2780
2781The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
2782characters having the `display' property.
2783
2784- :width WIDTH
2785
2786Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
2787character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
2788
2789- :relative-width FACTOR
2790
2791Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
2792first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
2793same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
2794width of that character by FACTOR.
2795
2796- :align-to HPOS
2797
2798Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
2799value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
2800
2801Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
2802
2803- :height HEIGHT
2804
2805Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
2806normal line height.
2807
2808- :relative-height FACTOR
2809
2810The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
2811of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
2812
2813- :ascent ASCENT
2814
2815Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
2816used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
2817baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
2818equal to 100.
2819
2820You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
2821
2822*** Images
2823
2824A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
2825. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
2826in the display, the characters having this display specification in
2827their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
2828the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
2829`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
2830area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
2831the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
2832as display specification.
2833
2834*** Other display properties
2835
2836- :space-width FACTOR
2837
2838Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
2839should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
2840integer or float.
2841
2842- :height HEIGHT
2843
2844Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
2845
2846If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
2847means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
2848the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
2849``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
2850a font is available counts as a step.
2851
2852If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
2853as tall as the frame's default font.
2854
2855If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
2856height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
2857
2858Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
2859`height' bound to the current specified font height.
2860
2861- :raise FACTOR
2862
2863FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
2864font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
2865raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
2866amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
2867`:height' subproperty.
2868
2869*** Conditional display properties
2870
2871All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
2872has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
2873applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
2874During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
2875the text having the `display' property.
2876
2877The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
2878`(:when t SPEC)'.
2879
2880+++
2881** New menu separator types.
2882
2883Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
2884item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
2885treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
2886to specify other menu separator types.
2887
2888- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
2889
2890No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
2891separator occurs.
2892
2893- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
2894
2895A single line in the menu's foreground color.
2896
2897- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
2898
2899A double line in the menu's foreground color.
2900
2901- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
2902
2903A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
2904
2905- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
2906
2907A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
2908
2909- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
2910
2911A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
2912displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
2913
2914- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
2915
2916A single line with 3D raised appearance.
2917
2918- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
2919
2920A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
2921
2922- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
2923
2924A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
2925
2926- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
2927
2928Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
2929
2930- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
2931
2932Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
2933
2934- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
2935
2936Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
2937
2938- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
2939
2940Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
2941
2942Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
2943the corresponding single-line separators.
2944
2945+++
2946** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
2947
2948The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
2949`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
2950Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
2951that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
2952default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
2953default background is the background color of the frame, and the
2954default foreground is black.
2955
2956The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
2957(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
2958`ScrollBarBackground').
2959
2960Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
2961settings for scroll bar colors.
2962
2963+++
2964** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
2965display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
2966
2967---
2968** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
2969starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
2970on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
2971line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
2972the original window start.
2973
2974---
2975** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
2976`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
2977now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
2978
2979+++
2980** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
2981
2982A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
2983`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
2984windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
2985other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
2986
2987The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
2988fixed-width and fixed-height.
2989
2990 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
2991
2992A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
2993fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
2994window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
2995change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
2996temporarily to nil, for example
2997
2998 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
2999 (enlarge-window 10))
3000
79214ddf 3001Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 3002or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
3003
3004** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
3005terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
3006to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
3007overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
3008horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
3009support a vertical-bar cursor).
e33b0397
DL
3010^L
3011* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
3012
3013** Not new, but not mentioned before:
3014M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
a933dad1
DL
3015\f
3016* Changes in Emacs 20.4
3017
3018** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
3019
3020You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
3021Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
3022`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
3023
3024If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
3025is the one that is used.
3026
3027** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
3028the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
3029Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
3030separate from the command's regular output.
3031Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
3032says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
3033In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
3034the buffer name.
3035
3036When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
3037output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
3038it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
3039cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
3040
3041** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
3042the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
3043is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
3044created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
3045
3046** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
3047example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
3048match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
3049quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
3050
3051** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
3052now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
3053if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
3054they never ignore case.
3055
3056** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
3057under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
3058applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
3059of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
3060just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
3061convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
3062part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
3063
3064If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
3065the same format that was used in the file before.
3066
3067You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
3068`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
3069
3070** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
3071renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
3072This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
3073
3074** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
3075The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
3076buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
3077your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
3078is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
3079end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
3080Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
3081
3082The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
3083eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
3084control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
3085format. You can now customize these variables.
3086
3087** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
3088filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
3089filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
3090enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
3091
3092** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
3093in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
3094windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
3095
3096** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
3097dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
3098doesn't have any effect.
3099
3100** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
3101not one per buffer.
3102
3103** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
3104use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
3105 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
3106
3107** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
3108To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
3109`auto-show-mode' command.
3110
3111** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
3112avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
3113versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
3114choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
3115occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
3116
3117** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
3118cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
3119
3120** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
3121character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
3122feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
3123
3124** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
3125the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
3126interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
3127and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
3128
3129** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
3130
3131The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
3132that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
3133one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
3134codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
3135set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
3136
3137Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
3138from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
3139
3140IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
3141equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
3142a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
3143`?' on other systems.
3144
3145IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
3146feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
3147Unix.
3148
3149Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
3150current codepage when it starts.
3151
3152** Mail changes
3153
feab4fba
GM
3154*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
3155`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
3156appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
3157non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
3158MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
3159headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
3160latin-1:
3161
3162 MIME-version: 1.0
3163 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
3164 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
3165
a933dad1
DL
3166*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
3167default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
3168default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
3169sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
3170buffer-file-coding-system.
3171
3172You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
3173sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
3174mail.
3175
3176*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
3177if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
3178Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
3179list of possible coding systems.
3180
3181** CC Mode changes
3182
3183*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
3184modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
3185longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
3186docstring for details.
3187
3188*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
3189symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
3190found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
3191prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
3192lineup functions use this feature currently.
3193
3194*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
3195"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
3196
3197*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
3198"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
3199
3200*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
3201from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
3202symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
3203c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
3204anonymous classes.
3205
3206*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
3207syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
3208
3209*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
3210inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
3211support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
3212function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
3213
3214*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
3215(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
3216brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
3217c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
3218(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
3219
3220*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
3221
3222*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
3223
3224*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
3225for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
3226
3227*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
3228
3229*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
3230associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
3231This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
3232circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
3233class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
3234
3235** Gnus changes.
3236
3237*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
3238added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
3239Gnus manual for the full story.
3240
3241*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
3242before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
3243group, which is created automatically.
3244
3245*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
3246values.
3247
3248*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
3249
3250*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
3251outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
3252
3253*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
3254`C-u C-c C-c'.
3255
3256*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
3257
3258*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
3259re-highlighting of the article buffer.
3260
3261*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
3262
3263*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
3264Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
3265
3266*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
3267`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
3268
3269*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
3270control over simplification.
3271
3272*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
3273
3274*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
3275limit.
3276
3277*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
3278
3279*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
3280
79214ddf 3281*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
a933dad1
DL
3282If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
3283rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
3284
3285*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
3286`a' forces normal posting method.
3287
3288*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
3289-- `W d'.
3290
3291*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
3292to a non-nil value.
3293
3294*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
3295where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
3296
3297*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
3298has been added.
3299
3300*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
3301
3302*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
3303
3304*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
3305`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
3306
3307*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
3308`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
3309
3310*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
3311
3312*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
3313been added.
3314
3315*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
3316`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
3317
3318*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
3319updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
3320
3321*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
3322
3323*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
3324
3325*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
3326
3327** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
3328
3329*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
3330options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
3331nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
3332
3333*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
3334TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
3335of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
3336TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
3337can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
3338
3339*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
3340All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
3341but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
3342the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
3343
3344*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
3345the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
3346buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
3347mismatch.
3348
3349** Changes to RefTeX mode
3350
3351*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
3352file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
3353
3354*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
3355lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
3356characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
3357removed from the label.
3358
3359*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
3360a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
3361
3362*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
3363customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
3364
3365*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
3366`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
79214ddf 3367expressions.
a933dad1
DL
3368
3369*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
3370
3371** New/deleted modes and packages
3372
3373*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
3374SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
3375
3376*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
3377editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
3378SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
3379
3380*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
3381changes with a special face.
3382
3383*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
3384this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
3385Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
3386\f
3387* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
3388
3389** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
3390This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
3391conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
3392and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
3393check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
3394
3395The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
3396Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
3397distribution when the config.bat script is run.
3398
3399** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
3400MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
3401controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
3402directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
3403Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
3404on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
3405string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
3406program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
3407printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
3408
3409** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
3410output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
3411available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
3412input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
3413temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
3414program.
3415
3416An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
3417and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
3418programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
3419automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
3420as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
3421ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
3422
3423** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
3424a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
3425MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
3426was not documented clearly before.
3427
3428** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
3429This includes Tetris and Snake.
3430\f
3431* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
3432
3433** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
3434return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
3435They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
3436meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
3437
3438** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
3439WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
3440and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
3441
3442** Changes in the file-attributes function.
3443
3444*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
3445It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
3446
3447*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
3448the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
3449integers.
3450
3451** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
3452files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
3453arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
3454file names and attributes are returned.
3455
3456** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
3457sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
3458accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
3459It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
3460returns the result.
3461
3462** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
3463to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
3464
3465** New functions for base64 conversion:
3466
3467The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
3468into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
3469performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
3470optionally.
3471
3472Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
3473job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
3474
3475**
3476The new function process-running-child-p
3477will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
3478terminal to its own child process.
3479
3480** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
3481when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
3482to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
3483itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
3484
3485** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
3486be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
3487
3488** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
3489:included is an alias for :visible.
3490
3491easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
3492easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
3493to move or copy menu entries.
3494
3495** Multibyte editing changes
3496
3497*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
3498an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
3499make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
3500work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
3501char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
3502 (setq char (sref str idx)
3503 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
3504The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
3505
3506If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
3507(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
3508 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
3509
3510*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
3511region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
3512deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
3513
3514 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
3515
3516This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
3517across the boundary.
3518
3519*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
3520`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
3521 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
3522 contains 8-bit characters.
3523 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
3524 contains invalid characters.
3525
3526*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
3527text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
3528preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
3529text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
3530way.
3531
3532*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
3533If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
3534end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
3535prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
3536
3537*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
3538compose Thai characters in a string.
3539
3540** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
3541argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
3542for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
3543menus should always use the third argument.
3544
3545** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
3546read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
3547arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
3548input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
3549
3550** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
3551of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
3552programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
3553inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
3554
3555** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
3556the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
3557returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
3558echo area contents.
3559
3560 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
3561
3562** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
3563NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
3564requested feature cannot be loaded.
3565
3566** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
3567foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
79214ddf 3568means to clear out that attribute.
a933dad1
DL
3569
3570** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
3571gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
3572
3573** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
3574read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
3575unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
3576end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
3577
3578** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
3579the gap of the current buffer.
3580
3581** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
3582to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
3583current buffer.
3584
3585** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
3586facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
3587These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
3588it back in after any modifications have been made.
3589\f
3590* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
3591
3592** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
3593the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
3594/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
3595directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
3596subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
3597
3598Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
3599names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
3600Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
3601which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
3602these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
3603
3604Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
3605starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
3606time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
3607
3608This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
3609Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
3610to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
3611subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
3612`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
3613results.
3614
3615** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
3616GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
3617that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
3618fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
3619\f
3620* Changes in Emacs 20.3
3621
3622** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
3623including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
3624it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
3625perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
3626
3627** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
3628specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
3629region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
3630further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
3631command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
3632within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
3633are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
3634region.
3635
3636In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
3637selective undo.
3638
3639** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
3640unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
3641buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
3642effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
3643Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
3644
3645The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
3646though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
3647-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
3648load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
3649
3650** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
3651no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
3652enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
3653something that most users not do.
3654
3655** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
3656operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
3657The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
3658applications.
3659
3660C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
3661pasting operations.
3662
3663** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
3664setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
3665like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
3666printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
3667`ps-printer-name'.
3668
3669** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
3670minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
3671any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
3672except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
3673incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
3674hits a new word.
3675
3676Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
3677Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
3678to be confused by TeX commands.
3679
3680You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
3681correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
3682clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
3683of various alternative replacements and actions.
3684
3685Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
3686the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
3687corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
3688alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
3689flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
3690
3691Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
3692flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
3693
3694** Changes in input method usage.
3695
3696Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
3697the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
3698respectively.
3699
3700You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
3701
3702If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
3703of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
3704
3705The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
3706that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
3707
3708 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
3709
3710 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
3711
3712 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
3713 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
3714
3715 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
79214ddf 3716 given in the following case:
a933dad1
DL
3717 o When you are using a complex input method.
3718 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
3719
3720If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
3721input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
3722and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
3723setting it to t is helpful.
3724
3725The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
3726
3727In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
3728keys:
3729 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
3730 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
3731 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
3732These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
3733environment.
3734
3735** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
3736names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
3737minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
3738get
3739
3740 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
3741
3742which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
3743
3744Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
3745Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
3746
3747** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
3748at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
3749its owner and group.
3750
3751** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
3752Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
3753
3754** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
3755contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
3756
3757** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
3758which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
3759in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
3760by the left edge of the rectangle.
3761
3762** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
3763increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
3764C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
3765for writing keyboard macros.
3766
3767** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
3768files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
3769frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
3770the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
3771additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
3772info.
3773
3774** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
3775
3776** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
3777query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
3778contents only.
3779
3780** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
3781confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
3782the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
3783says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
3784
3785** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
3786non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
3787literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
3788
3789** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
3790now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
3791Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
3792inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
3793
3794** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
3795failure if the command produces no output.
3796
3797** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
3798manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
3799the mouse.
3800
3801** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
3802mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
3803function and variable names.
3804
3805** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
3806reading specific files. This has higher priority than
3807file-coding-system-alist.
3808
3809** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
3810t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
3811converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
3812the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
3813according to the current fontset.
3814
3815** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
3816
3817The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
3818that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
3819nonascii-insert-offset.
3820
3821For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
3822enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
3823nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
3824characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
3825
3826** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
3827an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
3828
3829** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
3830letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
3831
3832** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
3833are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
3834command keys.
3835
3836** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
3837user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
3838
3839Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
3840user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
3841all variables that have documentation.
3842
3843** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
3844shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
3845that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
3846minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
3847it should show; the default is 20.
3848
3849Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
3850the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
3851of your input.
3852
3853** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
3854all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
3855recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
3856argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
3857the customizable options which were changed since that version.
3858Newly added options are included as well.
3859
3860If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
3861then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
3862for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
3863
3864This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
3865Customize menu.
3866
3867** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
3868the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
3869
3870** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
3871buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
3872invoked.
3873
3874** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
3875that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
3876The default is 1.
3877
3878** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
3879syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
3880new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
3881(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
3882sensibly.
3883
3884** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
3885
3886** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
3887value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
3888two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
3889
3890** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
3891reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
3892for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
3893every night.
3894
7464346d
GM
3895** Desktop changes
3896
3897*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
a933dad1
DL
3898the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
3899
7464346d
GM
3900*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
3901and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
3902
a933dad1
DL
3903** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
3904read and post multi-lingual articles.
3905
3906** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
3907doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
3908be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
3909outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
3910the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
79214ddf 3911made invisible again.
a933dad1
DL
3912
3913** Mail reading and sending changes
3914
3915*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
3916the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
3917changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
3918toggle.
3919
3920*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
3921now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
3922summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
3923the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
3924rmail-default-body-file.
3925
3926*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
3927longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
3928handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
3929
3930*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
3931it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
3932is evaluated to insert the signature.
3933
3934*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
3935outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
3936handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
3937putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
3938transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
3939especially interested in trying feedmail.
3940
3941feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
3942feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
3943provided by feedmail are:
3944
3945**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
3946stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
3947there is also a queue for draft messages
3948
3949**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
3950be prompted for confirmation
3951
3952**** does smart filling of address headers
3953
3954**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
3955the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
3956can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
3957
3958**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
3959the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
3960/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
3961function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
3962
3963** Dired changes
3964
3965*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
3966files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
3967
3968*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
3969run Dired on the directory name at point.
3970
3971*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
3972files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
3973for a specified regexp.
3974
3975** VC Changes
3976
3977*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
3978conveniently.
3979
3980*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
3981faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
3982Dired.
3983
3984VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
3985directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
3986listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
3987currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
3988
3989You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
3990then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
3991vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
3992control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
3993on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
3994
3995All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
3996is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
3997`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
3998the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
3999`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
4000
4001The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
4002toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
79214ddf 4003VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
a933dad1
DL
4004`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
4005
4006Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
4007ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
4008command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
4009
4010*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
4011file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
4012session to resolve them.
4013
4014Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
4015resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
4016contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
4017uses as well).
4018
4019*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
4020command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
4021you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
4022either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
4023branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
4024If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
4025using ediff.
4026
4027** Changes in Font Lock
4028
4029*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
4030are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
4031use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
4032unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
4033compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
4034
4035** Frame name display changes
4036
4037*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
4038frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
4039raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
4040when many frames are invisible or iconified.
4041
4042*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
4043frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
4044menu.
4045
4046** Comint (subshell) changes
4047
4048*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
4049subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
4050with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
4051
4052*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
4053
4054C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
4055that is, the line after the last line you got.
4056You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
4057
4058C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
4059send the current line together with the following line, when you send
4060the following line.
4061
4062C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
4063which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
4064previously sent input.
4065
4066C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
4067it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
4068as the search string.
4069
4070*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
4071automatically in compilation-mode windows.
4072
4073** C mode changes
4074
4075*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
4076and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
4077assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
79214ddf 4078definition.
a933dad1
DL
4079
4080*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
4081(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
4082Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
4083style is still the default however.
4084
4085*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
4086
4087*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
4088are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
4089them. They do not have key bindings by default.
4090
4091*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
4092and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
4093
4094*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
4095namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
4096
4097*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
4098makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
4099
4100*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
4101c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
4102
4103*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
4104should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
4105package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
4106variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
4107
4108** Changes to hippie-expand.
4109
79214ddf 4110*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
a933dad1
DL
4111non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
4112which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
4113
4114*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
4115non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
4116expanding dynamically.
4117
4118*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
4119non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
4120
4121*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
4122non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
4123this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
4124expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
4125
4126*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
4127
4128** Changes in BibTeX mode.
4129
4130*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
4131bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
4132automatic key generation. This replaces variable
4133bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
4134against the first word in the title.
4135
4136*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
4137capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
4138bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
79214ddf 4139lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
a933dad1 4140lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
79214ddf 4141bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
a933dad1
DL
4142
4143*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
4144generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
4145replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
4146bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
4147
4148** Changes in vcursor.el.
4149
4150*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
4151and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
4152variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
4153entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
4154`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
4155in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
4156
4157*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
4158Editing group once the package is loaded.
4159
4160*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
4161generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
4162vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
4163
4164*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
4165vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
4166
4167** Ispell changes.
4168
79214ddf
FP
4169*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
4170buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
a933dad1
DL
4171are identified by syntax tables in effect.
4172
4173*** Generic region skipping implemented.
4174A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
4175and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
4176defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
79214ddf 4177include:
a933dad1
DL
4178
4179 o URLs are automatically skipped
4180 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
4181
4182*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
4183
4184** Changes to RefTeX mode
4185
4186RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
4187large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
4188re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
4189section `Optimizations' in the manual.
4190
4191*** New recursive parser.
4192
4193The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
4194entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
4195recursive parser scans the individual files.
4196
4197*** Parsing only part of a document.
79214ddf 4198
a933dad1
DL
4199Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
4200partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
4201the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
4202
4203 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
4204
4205*** Storing parsing information in a file.
4206
4207This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
4208
4209 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
4210
4211*** Using multiple selection buffers
4212
4213If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
4214for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
4215
4216 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
4217
4218*** References to external documents.
4219
4220The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
4221documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
4222documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
4223macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
4224RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
4225the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
4226The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
4227
4228*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
4229
4230The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
4231and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
4232
4233Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
4234the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
4235
4236*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
4237
4238The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
4239buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
4240
4241*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
4242
4243The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
4244contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
4245`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
4246have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
4247enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
4248at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
4249more.
4250
4251*** Support for the varioref package
4252
4253The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
4254
4255*** New hooks
4256
4257Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
4258and citations are created. These hooks are
4259`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
4260`reftex-format-cite-function'.
4261
4262*** Citations outside LaTeX
4263
4264The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
4265a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
4266
4267*** Short context is no longer fontified.
4268
4269The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
4270fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
4271fontified, use
4272
4273 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
4274
4275** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
4276With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
4277the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
4278directories that contain the same file name.
4279
4280Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
4281Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
4282file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
4283Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
4284have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
4285names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
4286directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
4287directory.
4288
4289** New modes and packages
4290
4291*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
4292It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
4293it, but some do not.
4294
4295*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
4296code.
4297
4298*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
4299current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
4300around in a buffer.
4301
4302Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
4303
4304*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
4305uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
4306be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
4307established system of notation similar to Chess.
4308
4309*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
4310documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
4311guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
4312
4313*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
4314available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
4315system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
4316simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
4317functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
4318the like.
4319
4320*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
4321identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
4322
4323*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
4324within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
4325used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
4326the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
4327
4328*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
4329
4330 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
4331 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
4332 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
4333 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
4334 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
4335 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
4336 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
4337 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
4338 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
4339 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
4340 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
4341
4342 Platform-specific modes:
4343
4344 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
4345 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
4346 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
4347 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
4348 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
4349 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
4350 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
4351 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
4352 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
4353\f
4354* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4355
4356** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
4357use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
4358That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
4359Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
4360
4361Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
4362you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
4363consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
4364
4365** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
4366and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
4367specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
4368searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
4369
4370** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
4371multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
4372character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
4373environment.
4374
4375** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
4376take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
4377string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
4378current input method for reading this one event.
4379
4380** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
4381now control whether to output certain characters as
4382backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
4383non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
4384characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
4385in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
4386\f
4387* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4388
4389** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
4390of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
4391
4392** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
4393in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
4394always increases point by 1.
4395
4396The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
4397considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
4398
4399See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
4400
4401** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
4402Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
4403default value changed. For example,
4404
4405 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
4406 :type 'integer
4407 :group 'foo
4408 :version "20.3")
4409
79214ddf 4410 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
a933dad1
DL
4411 :version "20.3")
4412
4413If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
4414default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
4415is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
4416`:version' in the top level group.
4417
4418This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
4419
4420** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
4421starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
4422
4423However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
4424symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
4425support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
4426to themselves.
4427
4428If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
4429this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
4430values whatever.
4431
4432** There is a new debugger command, R.
4433It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
4434in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
4435
4436** Frame-local variables.
4437
4438You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
4439the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
4440local bindings for that variable.
4441
4442These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
4443frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
4444modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
4445parameter name.
4446
4447Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
4448Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
4449active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
4450that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
4451
4452It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
4453clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
4454very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
4455through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
4456
4457** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
4458"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
4459evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
4460makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
4461See the documentation in sregex.el.
4462
4463** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
4464is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
4465parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
4466The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
4467
4468** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
4469If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
4470
4471** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
4472known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
4473define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
4474
4475** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
4476when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
4477it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
4478history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
4479
4480The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
4481return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
4482empty input.
4483
4484** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
4485for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
4486`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
4487Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
4488`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
4489
4490** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
4491echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
4492a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
4493default password to use if the user enters nothing.
4494
4495** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
4496specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
4497function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
4498place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
4499non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
4500
4501** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
4502If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
4503up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
4504end of the window, even if this requires computation.
4505
4506** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
4507which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
4508If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
4509
4510** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
4511holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
4512was directed to display this buffer.
4513
4514** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
4515with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
4516describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
4517other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
4518set-window-configuration.
4519
4520** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
4521window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
4522positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
4523windows and the choice of buffers to display.
4524
4525** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
4526override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
4527look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
4528
4529If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
4530non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
4531map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
4532
4533minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
4534and it is meant to be set by major modes.
4535
4536** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
4537except that it discards all text properties from the result.
4538
4539** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
4540USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
4541floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
4542
4543** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
4544to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
4545in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
4546it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
4547
4548** Menu changes
4549
4550*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
4551keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
4552better supported.
4553
4554The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
4555a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
4556you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
4557can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
4558then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
4559
4560*** A new format for menu items is supported.
4561
4562In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
4563 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
4564defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
4565starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
4566
4567The format is:
4568 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
4569 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
4570where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
4571string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
4572The supported properties include
4573
4574:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
4575 item is enabled.
4576:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
4577 item should appear in the menu.
79214ddf 4578:filter FILTER-FN
a933dad1
DL
4579 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
4580 which will be REAL-BINDING.
4581 It should return a binding to use instead.
4582:keys DESCRIPTION
4583 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
4584 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
4585 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
4586:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
4587 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
4588 keyboard binding.
4589:key-sequence nil
4590 This means that the command normally has no
4591 keyboard equivalent.
4592:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
4593:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
4594 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
4595 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
4596 value says whether this button is currently selected.
4597
4598Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
4599Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
4600
4601(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
4602
4603** New event types
4604
4605*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
4606mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
4607corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
4608which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
4609
4610 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
4611
4612where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
4613same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
4614indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
4615negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
4616the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
4617forward, away from the user.
4618
4619As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
4620
4621*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
4622files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
4623and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
4624filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
4625loaded into Emacs. The format is:
4626
4627 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
4628
4629where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
4630same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
4631that were dragged and dropped.
4632
4633As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
4634
4635** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
4636
4637*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
4638any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
4639to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
4640
4641*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
4642can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
4643that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
4644
4645*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
4646in Emacs 19 and before.
4647
4648The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
4649The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
4650
4651*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
4652buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
4653unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
4654representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
4655
4656This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
4657as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
4658viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
4659one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
4660will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
4661
4662This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
4663representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
4664(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
4665consistent with the new representation.
4666
4667*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
4668representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
4669about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
4670however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
4671
4672The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
4673nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
4674using the table nonascii-translation-table.
4675
4676*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
4677representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
4678representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
4679
4680The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
4681loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
4682is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
4683
4684*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
4685which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
4686
4687*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
4688which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
4689
4690*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
4691portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
4692so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
4693You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
4694
4695*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
4696it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
4697
4698*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
4699convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
4700buffer or string being searched.
4701
4702One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
4703[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
4704searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
4705searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
4706obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
4707you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
4708expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
4709
4710*** Structure of coding system changed.
4711
4712All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
4713by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
4714which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
4715as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
4716vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
4717your own alias name of a coding system by the function
4718define-coding-system-alias.
4719
4720The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
4721the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
4722access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
4723pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
4724character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
4725safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
4726'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
4727`iso-8859-1'.
4728
4729Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
4730The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
4731coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
4732(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
4733
4734Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
4735also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
4736are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
4737the other character sets and read it back correctly.
4738
4739*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
4740proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
4741This function requires a user interaction.
4742
4743*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
4744find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
4745select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
4746systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
4747a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
4748select-safe-coding-system.
4749
4750*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
4751decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
4752last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
4753was done.
4754
4755*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
4756used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
4757coding systems used by some specific language environment.
4758
4759*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
4760return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
4761characters are found, they now return a list of single element
4762`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
4763
4764*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
4765coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
4766coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
4767converted.
4768
4769*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
4770coding system for communicating with other X clients.
4771
4772*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
4773character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
4774character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
4775each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
4776either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
4777range of characters.
4778
4779*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
4780Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
4781
4782*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
4783in the current buffer at position POS.
4784
4785*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
4786input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
4787function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
4788character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
4789event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
4790binding input-method-function to nil.
4791
4792The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
4793method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
4794input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
4795the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
4796not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
4797
4798The input method function is not called when reading the second and
4799subsequent events of a key sequence.
4800
4801*** You can customize any language environment by using
4802set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
4803
4804The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
4805customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
4806instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
4807environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
4808exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
4809\f
4810* Changes in Emacs 20.1
4811
4812** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
4813options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
4814at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
4815tree structure.
4816
4817M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
4818user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
4819
4820With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
4821session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
4822in your .emacs file.)
4823
4824** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
4825You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
4826
4827** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
4828This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
4829
4830** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
4831immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
4832kills the region.
4833
4834The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
4835delete the character before point, as usual.
4836
4837** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
4838on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
4839by setting search-highlight to nil.)
4840
4841** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
4842insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
4843the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
4844onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
4845history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
4846past.)
4847
4848** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
4849This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
4850in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
4851TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
4852makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
4853
4854As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
4855and is an alias for it.
4856
4857If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
4858use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
4859
4860** Scrolling changes
4861
4862*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
4863position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
4864
4865In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
4866on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
4867where it started.
4868
4869*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
4870move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
4871screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
4872does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
4873
4874*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
4875top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
4876comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
4877recenters the window.
4878
4879** International character set support (MULE)
4880
4881Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
4882including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
4883Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
4884Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
4885features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
4886MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
4887
4888Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
4889coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
4890character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
4891variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
4892into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
4893
4894Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
4895generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
4896supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
4897language, to make it possible to type them.
4898
4899The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
4900character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
4901
4902The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
4903to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
4904
4905You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
4906
4907 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
4908
4909Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
4910characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
4911argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
4912already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
4913characters for their work until they want to change.
4914
4915*** Input methods
4916
4917An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
4918specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
4919has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
4920the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
4921support several input methods.
4922
4923The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
4924another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
4925work.
4926
4927A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
4928characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
4929composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
4930consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
4931sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
4932letter.
4933
4934The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
4935by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
4936First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
4937marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
4938mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
4939
4940None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
4941they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
4942phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
4943converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
4944
4945Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
4946word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
4947typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
4948the first guess is wrong.
4949
4950*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
4951turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
4952
4953If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
4954byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
4955they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
4956the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
4957
4958However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
4959use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
4960includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
4961translate automatically to and from either one.
4962
4963*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
4964
4965Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
4966file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
4967sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
4968what you want.
4969
4970If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
4971example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
4972system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
4973multibyte characters in that buffer.
4974
4975If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
4976character conversion as well.
4977
4978*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
4979
4980A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
4981Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
4982requires using many fonts.
4983
4984Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
4985collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
4986
4987A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
4988the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
4989have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
4990you would use a font.
4991
4992If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
4993specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
4994display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
4995
4996The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
4997(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
4998characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
4999or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
5000and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
5001
5002*** Defining fontsets.
5003
5004Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
5005chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
5006with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
5007
5008Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
5009of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
5010`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
5011standard fontset are created automatically.
5012
5013If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
5014argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
5015FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
5016with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
5017name is `fontset-startup'.
5018
5019Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
5020The resource value should have this form:
5021 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
5022FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
5023 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
5024 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
5025 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
5026The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
5027of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
5028CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
5029FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
5030
5031Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
5032last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
5033You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
5034
5035For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
5036font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
5037following resource,
5038 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
5039the font for ASCII is generated as below:
5040 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
5041Here is the substitution rule:
5042 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
5043 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
5044 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
5045 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
5046 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
5047
5048The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
5049fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
5050that function explicitly to create a fontset.
5051
5052With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
5053like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
5054name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
5055fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
5056fontsets.
5057
5058*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
5059defaults for a particular choice of language.
5060
5061Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
5062method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
5063visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
5064already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
5065language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
5066system for new files that you create.
5067
5068It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
5069set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
5070whole Emacs session.
5071
5072For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
5073chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
5074with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
5075
5076*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
5077specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
5078specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
5079the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
5080coding systems that Emacs supports.
5081
5082*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
5083lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
5084This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
5085After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
5086is used for *the immediately following command*.
5087
5088So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
5089write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
5090
5091If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
5092then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
5093
5094For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
5095visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
5096
5097*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
5098construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
5099to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
5100specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
5101of the file.
5102
5103*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
5104the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
5105code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
5106translated into that character code.
5107
5108This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
5109various countries to support the languages of those countries.
5110
5111By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
5112
5113*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
5114the coding system for keyboard input.
5115
5116Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
5117with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
5118some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
5119
5120By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
5121
5122Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
5123input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
5124translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
5125to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
5126designed to work with terminals.
5127
5128*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
5129specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
5130This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
5131has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
5132translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
5133in the corresponding buffer.
5134
5135By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
5136
5137*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
5138to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
5139It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
5140
5141*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
5142an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
5143command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
5144want to use.
5145
5146C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
5147method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
5148
5149*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
5150layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
5151remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
5152which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
5153
5154*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
5155the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
5156related information.
5157
5158*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
5159HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
5160scripts.
5161
5162*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
5163information about the support for a particular language.
5164You specify the language as an argument.
5165
5166*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
5167the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
5168first dash.
5169
5170A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
5171(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
5172whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
51731 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
5174
5175 A alternativnyj (Russian)
5176 B big5 (Chinese)
5177 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
5178 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
5179 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
5180 E euc-japan (Japanese)
5181 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5182 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
5183 K euc-korea (Korean)
5184 R koi8 (Russian)
5185 Q tibetan
5186 S shift_jis (Japanese)
5187 T lao
5188 T tis620 (Thai)
5189 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
5190 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5191 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
5192 v viqr (Vietnamese)
5193 z hz (Chinese)
5194
5195When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
5196two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
5197coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
5198keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
5199
5200*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
5201conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
5202
5203When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
5204into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
5205rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
5206Rmail files themselves.
5207
5208*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
5209conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
5210
5211Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
5212for sending mail:
5213
5214- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
5215- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
5216- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
5217 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
5218- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
5219
5220*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
5221to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
5222Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
5223translations.
5224
5225** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
5226of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
5227insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
5228without any conversion.
5229
5230** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
5231You can now specify any number of octal digits.
5232RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
5233any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
5234
5235** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
5236functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
5237
5238Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
5239Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
5240
5241Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
5242mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
5243
5244** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
5245complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
5246in the buffer before point.
5247
5248With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
5249symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
5250you are using.
5251
5252With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
5253just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
5254
5255** File locking works with NFS now.
5256
5257The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
5258in the same directory as FILENAME.
5259
5260This means that collision detection between two different machines now
5261works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
5262can become a bottleneck.
5263
5264The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
5265does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
5266create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
5267file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
5268rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
5269so useful that the change is worth while.
5270
5271When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
5272are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
5273collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
5274tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
5275
5276** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
5277it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
5278show-paren-mode.
5279
5280** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
5281selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
5282delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
5283
5284** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
5285within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
5286complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
5287
5288** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
5289it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
5290set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
5291
5292** Changes in View mode.
5293
5294*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
5295Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
5296
5297*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
5298view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
5299
5300*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
5301previous state.
5302
5303*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
5304scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
5305
5306*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
5307non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
5308not just the selected window.
5309
5310*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
5311read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
5312turns View mode on or off.
5313
5314*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
5315how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
5316delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
5317
5318** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
5319now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
5320
5321** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
5322has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
5323presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
5324which version to compare with.
5325
5326** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
79214ddf 5327blocks if a match is inside the block.
a933dad1
DL
5328
5329The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
5330is outside the block. By customizing the variable
5331isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
5332shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
5333
5334By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
5335of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
5336blocks, all of them or none.
5337
5338** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
5339current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
5340confirmation first.
5341
5342** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
5343now changes the major mode according to that file name.
5344However, the mode will not be changed if
5345(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
5346(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
5347 not suitable for ordinary files, or
5348(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
5349
5350This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
5351
5352However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
5353these commands do not change the major mode.
5354
5355** M-x occur changes.
5356
5357*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
5358it performs a case-sensitive search.
5359
5360*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
5361if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
5362using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
5363
5364** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
5365in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
5366window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
5367that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
5368buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
5369
5370** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
5371after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
5372appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
5373come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
5374
5375** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
5376selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
5377buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
5378
5379** Outline mode changes.
5380
5381*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
5382
5383*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
5384
5385** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
5386you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
5387Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
5388was already active.
5389
5390The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
5391unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
5392get confused by it.
5393
5394If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
5395set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
5396
5397** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
5398
5399*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
5400conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
5401character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
5402including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
5403
5404The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
5405mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
5406copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
5407
5408*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
5409are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
5410values.
5411
5412`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
5413case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
5414`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
5415case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
5416
5417** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
5418certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
5419can be. The default value is 30.
5420
5421** Changes in Mail mode.
5422
5423*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
5424Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
5425composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
5426`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
5427`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
5428behavior.
5429
5430C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
5431compose-mail-other-frame.
5432
5433*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
5434the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
5435replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
5436buffer that shows the original message.
5437
5438*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
5439with separator lines around the contents.
5440
5441*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
5442in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
5443definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
5444need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
5445
5446*** New features in the mail-complete command.
5447
5448**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
5449for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
5450controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
5451Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
5452
5453**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
5454to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
5455/etc/passwd.
5456
5457**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
5458to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
5459/etc/passwd.
5460
5461** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
5462special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
5463directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
5464reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
5465
5466Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
5467when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
5468be taken to be magic.
5469
5470** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
5471files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
5472available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
5473
5474M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
5475(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
5476
5477** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
5478suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
5479
5480In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
5481
5482new key dired.el binding old key
5483------- ---------------- -------
5484 * c dired-change-marks c
5485 * m dired-mark m
5486 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
5487 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
5488 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
5489 * u dired-unmark u
5490 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
5491 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
5492 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
5493 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
5494 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
5495 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
5496
5497** Rmail changes.
5498
5499*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
5500saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
5501chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
5502each time you run it.
5503
5504*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
5505whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
5506
5507*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
5508messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
5509means to move in the opposite direction.
5510
5511*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
5512you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
5513
5514*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
5515just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
5516It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
5517can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
5518for output.
5519
5520** Gnus changes.
5521
5522*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
5523
79214ddf
FP
5524*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
5525Gnus.
a933dad1 5526
79214ddf 5527*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
a933dad1
DL
5528`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
5529
5530*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
5531article mode line.
5532
5533*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
5534
5535*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
5536
5537(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
5538
5539*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
5540are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
5541`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
5542
5543*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
5544
5545*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
5546
5547*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
5548See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
5549
5550*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
5551Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
5552used to pick articles.
5553
5554*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
5555another have been added.
5556
5557 `M-x gnus-change-server'
5558
5559*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
5560generating lines in buffers.
5561
5562*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
5563`M-C-_'.
5564
5565*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
5566
5567*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
5568
5569 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
5570
5571*** Scores can be decayed.
79214ddf 5572
a933dad1
DL
5573 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
5574
5575*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
5576Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
5577
5578*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
5579the native server.
5580
5581 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
5582
5583*** A new command for reading collections of documents
5584(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
5585
5586*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
5587
5588*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
5589even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
5590
5591*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
5592(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
5593
5594 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
5595 a group.
5596
5597*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
5598sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
5599
5600 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
5601
5602*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
5603
5604 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
5605
5606*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
79214ddf 5607
a933dad1
DL
5608 Use the `Y c' command.
5609
5610*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
5611
5612*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
5613
5614 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
5615
5616*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
5617from incoming mail before saving the mail.
79214ddf 5618
a933dad1
DL
5619 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
5620
5621*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
5622
5623*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
5624the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
5625
5626 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
5627
5628Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
5629and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
5630from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
5631hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
5632this issue.)
5633
5634Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
5635automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
5636particular news group. This can be done by:
5637
5638 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
5639
5640Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
5641of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
5642"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
5643system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
5644for reading and posting).
5645
5646CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
5647 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
5648Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
5649newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
5650there.
5651
5652Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
5653default. Here are some of these default settings:
5654
5655 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
5656 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
5657 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
5658 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
5659 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
5660
5661When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
5662the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
5663
5664** CC mode changes.
5665
5666*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
5667code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
5668values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
5669this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
5670Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
5671loaded.
5672
5673If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
79214ddf 5674Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
a933dad1 5675style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
79214ddf
FP
5676share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
5677c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
a933dad1
DL
5678must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
5679
5680*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
5681of the current buffer.
5682
5683*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
5684it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
5685of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
5686
5687*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
5688style that the Python developers like.
5689
5690*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
5691This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
5692just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
5693
5694** VC Changes [new]
5695
5696** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
5697name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
5698directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
5699
5700This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
5701master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
5702developers.
5703
5704You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
5705RET in a buffer visiting that file.
5706
5707*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
5708other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
5709writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
5710calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
5711
5712*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
5713version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
5714
5715** Calendar changes.
5716
5717A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
5718of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
5719for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
5720
5721** ps-print changes
5722
79214ddf 5723There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
a933dad1
DL
5724
5725*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
5726
5727The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
5728formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
5729`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
5730`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
5731It defaults to `letter'.
5732If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
5733
5734The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
79214ddf 5735of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
a933dad1
DL
5736non-nil means "landscape" mode.
5737
5738The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
5739It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
79214ddf 5740It defaults to 1.
a933dad1
DL
5741
5742*** Horizontal layout
5743
5744The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
5745`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
5746All are measured in points.
5747
5748*** Vertical layout
5749
5750The vertical layout is determined by the variables
5751`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
5752All are measured in points.
5753
5754*** Headers
5755
5756If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
5757`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
5758margin above the text.
5759
79214ddf 5760If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
a933dad1
DL
5761framing box is printed around the header.
5762
5763The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
5764`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
5765
79214ddf
FP
5766The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
5767`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
a933dad1
DL
5768`ps-header-font-size'.
5769
5770*** Font managing
5771
5772The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
5773used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
5774`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
5775elements to this alist.
5776
79214ddf 5777The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
a933dad1
DL
5778for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
5779
5780** hideshow changes.
5781
5782*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
79214ddf 5783C++, ; for lisp).
a933dad1
DL
5784
5785*** Support for java-mode added.
5786
5787*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
5788in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
5789
5790*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
5791the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
5792way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
5793
5794*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
5795robust and a lot faster.
5796
79214ddf 5797*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
a933dad1
DL
5798
5799*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
5800to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
5801documentation for more details.
5802
5803** Changes in Enriched mode.
5804
5805*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
5806filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
5807of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
5808use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
5809the next time unless the fill-column is different.
5810
5811*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
5812distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
5813as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
5814as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
5815
5816** Font Lock mode
5817
5818*** Custom support
5819
5820The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
5821font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
5822faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
5823group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
5824your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
5825consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
5826
5827You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
5828
5829*** Maximum decoration
5830
5831Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
5832default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
5833of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
5834supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
5835to get the old behavior.
5836
5837*** New support
5838
5839Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
5840
5841Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
5842support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
5843
5844*** Configurable support
5845
5846Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
5847additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
5848c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
5849java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
5850list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
5851of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
5852convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
5853
5854Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
5855way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
5856it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
5857
5858*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
5859
5860You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
5861highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
5862for any mode.
5863
5864For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
5865
5866 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
5867
5868in your ~/.emacs.
5869
5870*** New faces
5871
5872Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
5873font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
5874distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
5875to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
5876
5877*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
5878
5879The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
5880cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
5881same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
5882
5883*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
5884
5885The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
5886according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
5887the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
5888non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
5889refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
5890the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
5891Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
5892
5893This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
5894For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
5895this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
5896refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
5897containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
5898the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
5899
5900As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
5901
5902Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
5903Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
5904Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
5905new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
5906
5907If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
5908settings.
5909
5910** Ada mode changes.
5911
5912*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
5913If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
5914procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
5915you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
5916stubs.
5917
5918*** There are two new commands:
5919 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
5920 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
5921
5922The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
5923`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
79214ddf 5924`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
a933dad1
DL
5925
5926*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
5927is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
5928Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
5929
5930*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
5931formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
5932places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
5933space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
5934
5935** Scheme mode changes.
5936
5937*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
5938mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
5939for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
5940with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
5941have any effect.
5942
5943If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
5944still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
5945scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
5946variables as buffer-local variables.
5947
5948*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
5949Use M-x dsssl-mode.
5950
133c9e59
GM
5951** Changes to the emacsclient program
5952
875c1439
GM
5953*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
5954USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
5955associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
5956can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
5957
133c9e59 5958*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
a933dad1
DL
5959it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
5960buffer in Emacs.
5961
133c9e59
GM
5962*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
5963use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
5964ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
5965option takes precedence.
5966
a933dad1
DL
5967** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
5968constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
5969(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
5970
5971** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
5972which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
5973the current defun.
5974
5975** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
5976following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
5977
5978** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
5979and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
5980necessary).
5981
5982** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
5983if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
5984these register values no longer become completely useless.
5985If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
5986asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
5987it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
5988
5989** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
5990example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
5991be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
5992you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
5993
5994You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
5995variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
5996file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
5997revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
5998only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
5999
6000** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
6001since it applies only to the current frame.
6002
6003** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
6004file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
6005and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
6006
6007This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
6008multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
6009variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
6010tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
6011instead of just the file you are editing.
6012
6013** RefTeX mode
6014
6015RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
6016and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
6017different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
6018multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
6019turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
6020
79214ddf 6021C-c ( reftex-label
a933dad1
DL
6022 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
6023 knows which kind of label is needed.
6024
6025C-c ) reftex-reference
6026 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
6027 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
6028
6029C-c [ reftex-citation
6030 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
6031 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
6032
6033C-c & reftex-view-crossref
6034 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
6035
6036C-c = reftex-toc
6037 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
6038 can quickly jump to every section.
79214ddf 6039
a933dad1
DL
6040Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
6041commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
6042Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
6043reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
6044C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
6045
6046** Changes in BibTeX mode.
6047
6048*** Info documentation is now available.
6049
6050*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
6051both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
6052
6053*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
6054bibtex-user-optional-fields.
6055
6056*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
6057(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
6058
6059*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
6060entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
6061appropriate functions.
6062
6063*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
6064entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
6065
6066*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
6067been cleaned.
6068
6069*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
6070bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
6071
6072*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
6073shall be delimited.
6074
6075*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
6076bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
6077bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
6078
6079*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
6080field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
6081prefixed with `ALT'.
6082
6083*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
6084bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
6085formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
6086documentation).
6087
6088*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
6089documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
6090for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
6091
6092*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
6093comma should be inserted at end of last field.
6094
6095*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
6096alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
6097signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
6098
6099*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
6100
6101*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
6102
6103*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
6104from alien sources.
6105
6106*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
6107to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
6108crossref entries.
6109
6110*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
6111region.
6112
6113*** Added support for imenu.
6114
6115*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
6116of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
6117`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
6118`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
6119
6120*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
6121from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
6122
6123** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
6124
30a009a5 6125** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
047f434a 6126
a933dad1
DL
6127** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
6128functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
6129Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
6130as an argument.
6131
6132When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
6133and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
6134
6135** browse-url changes
6136
6137*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
6138Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
6139(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
6140non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
6141customization variables.
6142
6143*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
6144
6145*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
6146lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
6147(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
6148
6149** Changes in Ediff
6150
6151*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
6152pops up the Info file for this command.
6153
6154*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
6155the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
6156merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
6157directories).
6158
6159*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
6160and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
6161files in the same directory.
6162
6163*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
6164The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
6165related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
6166
6167** Changes in Viper
6168
6169*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
79214ddf 6170*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
a933dad1
DL
6171 instead of vip-.
6172*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
79214ddf 6173*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
a933dad1
DL
6174Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
6175*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
6176*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
6177*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
6178color when Viper is in insert state.
6179*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
6180Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
6181viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
6182
6183** Etags changes.
6184
6185*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
6186default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
6187Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
6188variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
6189not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
6190
6191*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
6192
6193*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
6194constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
6195
6196*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
6197recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
6198In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
6199
6200*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
6201C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
6202recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
6203methods and protocols.
6204
6205*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
6206.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
6207column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
6208paragraph name.
6209
6210*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
6211an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
6212at least M times and as many as N times.
6213
6214** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
6215in files has changed slightly.
6216
6217With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
6218time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
6219This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
6220with old time-stamp-format values.
6221
6222In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
6223(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
6224This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
6225reasons.
6226
6227In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
6228natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
6229fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
6230(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
6231time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
6232specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
6233
6234Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
6235case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
6236truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
6237
6238The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
6239being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
6240future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
6241recommended now will continue to work then.
6242
6243See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
6244details.
6245
6246** There are some additional major modes:
6247
6248dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
6249m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
6250meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
6251
6252** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
6253copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
6254into Emacs.
6255
6256** New Lisp packages include:
6257
6258*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
6259
6260*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
6261be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
6262
6263*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
6264
6265*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
6266in shell buffers.
6267
6268*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
6269See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
6270and `elint-defun'.
6271
6272*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
6273meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
6274ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
6275strings or comments.
6276
6277These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
6278abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
6279you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
6280insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
6281at these points.
6282
6283*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
6284can visit them by short forms of their names.
6285
6286*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
6287Emacs Lisp function at point.
6288
6289*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
6290
6291*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
6292switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
6293
6294*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
6295
6296*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
6297
6298*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
6299
6300*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
6301from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
6302
6303*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
6304You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
6305inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
6306original place after inserting the copy.
6307
6308*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
6309on the buffer.
6310
6311You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
6312velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
6313(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
6314
6315Enable mouse-drag with:
6316 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
6317-or-
6318 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
6319
6320*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
6321mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
6322
6323*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
6324It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
6325
6326*** ogonek
6327
6328The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
6329Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
6330platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
6331TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
6332ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
6333prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
6334instance) and vice versa.
6335
6336To use this package load it using
6337 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
6338Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
79214ddf 6339 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
a933dad1
DL
6340 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
6341The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
6342ways of customization in `.emacs'.
6343
6344*** Interface to ph.
6345
6346Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
6347
6348The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
6349services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
6350these servers.
6351
6352*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
6353
6354*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
6355You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
6356while the real cursor does not move.
6357
6358*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
6359for visiting your favorite web sites.
6360
6361*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
6362so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
6363
6364** movemail change
6365
6366Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
6367mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
6368supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
6369user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
6370
6371This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
6372\f
6373* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
6374
6375** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
6376
6377Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
6378end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
6379Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
6380file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
6381file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
6382
6383To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
6384C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
6385coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
6386specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
6387LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
6388save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
6389\f
6390* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
6391
6392** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
6393Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
6394vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
6395Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
6396
6397** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
6398to start with w32- instead of win32-.
6399
6400In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
6401don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
6402"win".
6403
6404** Basic Lisp changes
6405
6406*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
6407evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
6408
6409*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
6410be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
6411or by the user.
6412
6413The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
6414
6415*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
6416
6417(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
6418(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
6419
6420*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
6421usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
6422its argument.
6423
6424*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
6425
6426*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
6427
6428*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
6429
6430*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
6431error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
6432include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
6433`format' function.
6434
6435*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
6436or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
6437whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
6438
6439*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
6440either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
6441adding one of these suffixes.
6442
6443*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
6444which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
79214ddf 6445If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
a933dad1
DL
6446
6447We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
6448because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
6449
6450*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
6451
6452*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
6453You must load the `cl' library to define it.
6454
6455*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
6456conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
6457
6458 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
6459
6460BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
6461BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
6462
6463*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
6464choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
6465restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
6466works using `save-current-buffer'.
6467
6468*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
6469write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
6470of the last form.
6471
6472*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
6473which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
6474last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
6475as the last form.
6476
6477*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
6478characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
6479matches.
6480
6481For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
6482
6483*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
6484with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
6485Then it returns that string.
6486
6487For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
6488
6489(with-output-to-string
6490 (princ "The buffer is ")
6491 (princ (buffer-name)))
6492
6493returns "The buffer is foo".
6494
6495** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
6496is non-nil.
6497
6498These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
6499buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
6500characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
6501
6502*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
6503a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
6504
6505Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
6506character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
6507Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
6508position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
6509characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
6510 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
6511
6512ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
6513Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
6514non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
6515characters".
6516
6517The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
6518through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
6519"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
6520range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
6521leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
6522
6523*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
6524(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
6525multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
6526character, which may be more than one buffer position.
6527
6528This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
6529always one buffer position, need to be changed.
6530
6531However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
79214ddf 6532
a933dad1
DL
6533*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
6534because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
6535have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
6536the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
6537guaranteed.
6538
6539*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
6540between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
6541character).
6542
6543When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
6544
6545 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
6546 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
6547 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
6548 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
6549 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
6550
6551*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
6552
6553*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
6554`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
6555more than the number of characters.
6556
6557You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
6558it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
6559\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
6560is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
6561follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
6562newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
6563
6564*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
6565and returns a string containing those characters.
6566
6567*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
6568(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
6569counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
6570character, sref signals an error.
6571
6572*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
6573in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
6574string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
6575
6576*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
6577in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
6578region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
6579
6580*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
6581the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
6582to a vector of the characters in it.
6583
6584*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
6585of a string. You call it as follows:
6586
6587 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
6588
6589This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
6590STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
6591This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
6592Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
6593it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
6594
6595*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
6596if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
6597
6598*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
6599if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
6600
6601*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
6602to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
6603not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
6604which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
6605
6606(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
6607
6608This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
6609
6610The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
6611If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
6612are not included in the resulting value.
6613
6614The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
6615at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
6616WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
6617is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
6618
6619If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
6620place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
6621character extends across that column), then the padding character
6622PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
6623string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
6624column START-COLUMN.
6625
6626*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
6627the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
6628necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
6629difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
6630changed text, before the change.
6631
6632*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
6633sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
6634one character set for each script, not for each language.
6635
6636**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
6637
6638**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
6639
6640**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
6641set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
6642
6643**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
6644name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
6645which identify the character within that character set.
6646
6647**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
6648byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
6649opposite of split-char.
6650
6651**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
6652of all the characters between BEG and END.
6653
6654**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
6655of all the characters in a string.
6656
6657*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
6658and specifying coding systems.
6659
6660**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
6661system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
6662of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
6663(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
6664and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
6665as what to do about code conversion.)
6666
6667**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
6668name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
6669
6670**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
6671for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
6672except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
6673
6674Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
6675which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
6676to match against a file name.
6677
6678VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
6679a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
6680decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
6681to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
6682systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
6683specifies the coding system for encoding.
6684
6685If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
6686or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
6687
6688**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
6689the coding system to use for network sockets.
6690
6691Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
6692which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
6693either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
6694service names.
6695
6696VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
6697a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
6698decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
6699to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
6700systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
6701specifies the coding system for encoding.
6702
6703If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
6704or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
6705
6706**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
6707for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
6708except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
6709start the subprocess.
6710
6711**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
6712systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
6713when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
6714(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
6715to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
6716
6717**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
6718coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
6719subprocess.
6720
6721It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
6722but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
6723start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
6724connection permanently or until overridden.
6725
6726The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
6727file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
6728network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
6729coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
6730It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
6731system for one operation at a time.
6732
6733**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
6734files, subprocesses or network connections.
6735
6736**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
6737coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
6738The value is a cons cell,
6739 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
6740where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
6741the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
6742input to the subprocess.
6743
6744**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
6745change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
6746
6747** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
6748customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
6749you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
6750
6751You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
6752variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
6753information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
6754legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
6755customization.
6756
6757Thus, instead of writing
6758
6759 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
6760 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
6761
6762you would now write this:
6763
6764 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
6765 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
6766 :type 'boolean
6767 :group foo)
6768
6769The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
6770two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
6771describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
6772for a description of them.
6773
6774The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
6775should belong to. You define a new group like this:
6776
6777 (defgroup ispell nil
6778 "Spell checking using Ispell."
6779 :group 'processes)
6780
6781The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
6782group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
6783but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
6784to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
6785second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
6786
6787Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
6788package should have just one group; a more complex package should
6789have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
6790package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
6791first-level subgroups.
6792
6793** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
6794
6795This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
6796separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
6797
6798** easy-mmode
6799
6800The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
6801developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
6802only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
6803predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
6804`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
6805`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
6806
6807** Text property changes
6808
6809*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
6810text property.
6811
6812*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
6813previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
6814place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
6815functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
6816starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
6817
6818If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
6819LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
6820of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
6821position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
6822
6823*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
6824value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
6825is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
6826
6827** Changes in invisibility features
6828
6829*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
6830hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
6831is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
6832should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
6833would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
6834make the overlay visible.
6835
6836During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
6837invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
6838needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
6839which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
6840the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
6841t when it should hide it.
6842
6843*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
6844
6845Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
79214ddf
FP
6846invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
6847and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
a933dad1 6848Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
79214ddf 6849manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
a933dad1
DL
6850Here is an example of how to do this:
6851
6852 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
79214ddf 6853 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
a933dad1 6854 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
79214ddf 6855 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
a933dad1
DL
6856
6857 ...
6858 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
6859
6860 ...
6861 ;; When done with the overlays:
6862 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
6863 ;; Or respectively:
6864 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
6865
6866** Changes in syntax parsing.
6867
6868*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
6869`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
6870obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
6871`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
6872
6873If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
6874is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
6875used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
6876
6877When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
6878character in the buffer is calculated thus:
6879
6880 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
6881 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
6882
6883 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
6884 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
6885 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
6886
6887 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
6888 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
6889 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
6890 determine the syntax type of the character.
6891
6892 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
6893 of the current buffer.
6894
6895*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
6896value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
6897for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
6898
6899*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
6900and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
6901only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
6902character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
6903another character with the same code (unless quoted).
6904
6905These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
6906text property.
6907
6908*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
6909arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
6910of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
6911
6912*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
6913(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
6914element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
6915nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
6916string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
6917
6918*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
6919syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
6920`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
6921
6922** Changes in face features
6923
6924*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
6925if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
6926
6927*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
6928of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
6929
6930*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
6931set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
6932
6933*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
6934set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
6935
6936*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
6937by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
6938and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
6939the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
6940overlay property).
6941
6942This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
6943arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
6944
6945** Changes in file-handling functions
6946
6947*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
6948directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
6949they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
6950is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
6951
6952This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
6953begins with ~.
6954
6955*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
6956it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
6957
6958*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
6959the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
6960
6961*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
6962as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
6963
6964*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
6965character code conversion as well as other things.
6966
6967Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
6968(formerly it did not).
6969
6970*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
6971environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
6972
6973*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
6974instead of constant strings.
6975
6976*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
6977to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
6978any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
6979
6980substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
6981in the same way as before.
6982
6983*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
6984The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
6985which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
6986
6987*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
6988error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
6989else, and returns nil.
6990
6991*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
6992directory cannot be listed.
6993
6994** Changes in minibuffer input
6995
6996*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
6997read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
6998additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
6999argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
7000ways:
7001
7002 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
7003 It is available through the history command M-n.
7004
7005*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
7006read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
7007argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
7008minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
7009enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
7010
7011In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
7012argument in this way.
7013
7014*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
7015from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
7016minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
7017
7018** Echo area features
7019
7020*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
7021echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
7022minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
7023after the echo area is cleared.
7024
7025*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
7026in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
7027
7028** Keyboard input features
7029
7030*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
7031set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
7032
7033*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
7034received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
7035by keyboard macros.
7036
7037** Frame-related changes
7038
7039*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
7040creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
7041hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
7042
7043*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
7044the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
7045has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
7046
7047*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
7048selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
7049value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
7050in the selected frame.
7051
7052*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
7053is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
7054which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
7055
7056** X Windows features
7057
7058*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
7059x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
7060x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
7061
7062*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
7063The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
7064
7065*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
7066MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
7067A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
7068
7069If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
7070it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
7071
7072** Subprocess features
7073
7074*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
7075functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
7076automatically.
7077
7078*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
7079and returns the output from the command as a string.
7080
7081*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
7082and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
7083
7084** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
7085does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
7086
7087** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
7088at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
7089goes after the other menu items.
7090
7091** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
79214ddf 7092of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
a933dad1
DL
7093around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
7094are in use.
7095
7096The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
7097series of several changes--if that seems safe.
7098
7099Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
7100after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
7101form.
7102
7103** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
7104is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
7105but its hook is still run.
7106
7107** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
7108for errors that are handled by condition-case.
7109
7110If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
7111regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
7112useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
7113
7114This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
7115are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
7116filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
7117warned.
7118
7119** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
7120way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
7121
7122** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
7123integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
7124functions like display-time.
7125
7126** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
7127name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
7128
7129** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
7130can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
7131is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
7132
7133** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
7134if there is an error in compilation.
7135
7136** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
7137switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
7138argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
7139they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
7140
7141** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
7142Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
7143the *scratch* buffer.
7144
7145** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
7146The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
7147where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
7148e.g., in Font Lock mode.
7149
7150** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
7151and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
7152It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
7153
7154** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
7155using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
7156variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
7157and compose-mail-other-frame.
7158
7159** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
7160can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
7161full name of the specified user will be returned.
7162
7163** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
7164of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
7165where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
7166in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
7167option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
7168files at all.
7169
7170** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
7171and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
7172width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
7173the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
7174
7175For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
7176minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
7177with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
7178is how %S normally pads to two positions.
7179
7180** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
7181
7182** imenu.el changes.
7183
7184You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
79214ddf 7185item from menu created by imenu.
a933dad1
DL
7186
7187An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
7188#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
7189select one of those items.
7190\f
7191* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
7192\f
7193* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
7194
7195** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
7196mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
7197
7198** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
7199use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
7200Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
7201\f
7202* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
7203
7204** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
7205To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
7206
7207** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
7208conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
7209matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
7210expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
7211word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
7212all caps.
7213
7214** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
7215at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
7216
7217When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
7218does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
7219as in previous Emacs versions.
7220
7221** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
7222non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
7223time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
7224frames.
7225
7226** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
7227if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
7228This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
7229Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
7230accident.
7231
7232** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
7233keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
7234It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
7235line and then executing the macro.
7236
7237This command is not new, but was never documented before.
7238
7239** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
7240(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
7241characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
7242characters.
7243
7244** Font Lock mode
7245
7246*** Font Lock support modes
7247
7248Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
7249below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
7250hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
7251to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
7252Font Lock mode is enabled.
7253
7254For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
7255
7256 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
7257
7258in your ~/.emacs.
7259
7260*** lazy-lock
7261
7262The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
7263only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
7264becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
7265Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
7266occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
7267buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
7268Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
7269
7270To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
7271
7272 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
7273
7274To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
7275
7276** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7277
7278*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
7279paren and key.
7280
7281*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
7282supported.
7283
7284** Gnus changes.
7285
7286Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
7287commands and variables have been added. There should be no
7288significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
7289previously released version, except in the message composition area.
7290
7291Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
7292between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
7293
79214ddf 7294*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
a933dad1
DL
7295variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
7296obsolete.
7297
7298*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
7299missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
7300
7301 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
7302
7303*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
7304
7305 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
7306
7307*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
79214ddf 7308referred.
a933dad1
DL
7309
7310*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
7311
7312 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
7313
7314*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
7315
7316 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
7317
7318*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
79214ddf 7319buffers.
a933dad1
DL
7320
7321 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
7322
7323*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
7324
7325 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
7326
7327*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
7328
7329 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
7330
7331*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
7332
7333 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
7334
7335*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
7336is possible.
7337
7338 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
7339
7340*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
7341groups of groups.
7342
7343*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
7344
7345*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
79214ddf 7346batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
a933dad1
DL
7347
7348*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
7349
7350*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
7351
7352*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
7353
7354 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
7355
7356*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
7357expiration times.
7358
7359*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
7360
7361*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
7362process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
7363
7364*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
7365articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
7366bound to keys on the `/' submap.
7367
7368*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
7369articles with the `*' command.
7370
7371*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
7372
7373*** Article headers can be buttonized.
7374
7375 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
7376
7377*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
7378
79214ddf 7379*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
a933dad1
DL
7380`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
7381
7382*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
79214ddf 7383buffer.
a933dad1
DL
7384
7385*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
7386
7387*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
7388
7389*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
7390
7391 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
7392
79214ddf 7393*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
a933dad1
DL
7394
7395 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
7396
79214ddf 7397*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
a933dad1
DL
7398
7399*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
7400
79214ddf 7401*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
a933dad1 7402
79214ddf 7403 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
a933dad1
DL
7404 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
7405
7406*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
79214ddf 7407refetching.
a933dad1
DL
7408
7409 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
7410
7411*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
7412buffer to allow easier treatment.
7413
7414*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
7415
7416*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
7417
7418 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
7419
7420*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
79214ddf 7421articles.
a933dad1
DL
7422
7423 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
7424
79214ddf 7425*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
a933dad1
DL
7426
7427*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
7428cited text to hide is now customizable.
7429
7430 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
7431
7432*** Boring headers can be hidden.
7433
7434 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
7435
7436*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
7437
7438*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
7439
7440The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
7441in greater detail.
7442\f
7443* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
7444
7445** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
7446second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
7447asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
7448exists.
7449
7450** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
7451as well as lists.
7452
7453** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
7454of a given keymap.
7455
7456** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
7457given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
7458keymap or nil.
7459
7460** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
7461an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
7462name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
7463menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
7464equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
7465alias.
7466\f
7467* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
7468
7469** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
7470
7471Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
7472This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
7473was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
7474far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
7475pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
7476
7477For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
7478you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
7479`http://www.vtw.org/'.
7480
7481** A note about C mode indentation customization.
7482
7483The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
7484do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
7485It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
7486much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
7487chapter of the manual for details.
7488
7489However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
7490customization variables take effect.
7491
7492** Marking with the mouse.
7493
7494When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
7495highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
7496using M-x transient-mark-mode.
7497
7498** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
7499
7500*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
7501
7502*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
7503to work on NT only and not on 95.)
7504
7505*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
7506in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
7507you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
7508application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
7509applications, these problems are significant.
7510
7511If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
7512likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
7513However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
7514will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
7515other DOS application as a subprocess.
7516
7517Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
7518You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
7519
7520If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
7521subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
7522have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
7523Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
7524separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
7525Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
7526
7527** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
7528
7529This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
7530which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
7531minibuffer contains.
7532
7533** `title' frame parameter and resource.
7534
7535The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
7536It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
7537It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
7538affects just the displayed title of the frame.
7539
7540The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
7541it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
7542and also serves as the default for the displayed title
7543when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
7544
7545** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
7546enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
7547
7548** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
7549F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
7550Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
7551
7552If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
7553menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
7554something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
7555the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
7556
7557 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
7558
7559** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
7560to replace the characters it "deletes".
7561
7562** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
7563
7564** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
7565a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
7566select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
7567It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
7568immediately after the selected one.
7569
7570This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
7571made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
7572
7573** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
7574
7575Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
7576directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
7577If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
7578Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
7579recover-session.
7580
7581You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
7582auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
7583will not work.
7584
7585Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
7586normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
7587this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
7588bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
7589now that the bug is fixed.
7590
7591** Changes to Version Control (VC)
7592
7593There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
7594when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
7595Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
7596which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
7597
7598If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
7599telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
7600VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
7601the link is visited and a warning displayed.
7602
7603** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
7604Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
7605is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
7606
7607There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
7608Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
7609enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
7610The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
7611remain normal.
7612
7613** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
7614header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
7615
7616Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
7617known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
7618offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
7619Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
7620
7621Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
7622of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
7623a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
7624name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
7625documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
7626`mail-directory-stream'.)
7627
7628** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
7629skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
7630characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
7631with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
7632
7633Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
7634- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
7635wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
7636
7637The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
7638less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
7639headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
7640Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
7641Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
7642fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
7643to a limitation in font-lock).
7644
7645External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
7646
7647** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
7648buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
7649buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
7650this example:
7651
7652 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
7653 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
7654
7655** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7656
7657*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
7658
7659*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
7660
7661*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
7662
7663*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
7664entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
7665will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
7666isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
7667(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
7668The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
7669
7670*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
7671does the same job.
7672
7673*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
7674"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
7675
7676*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
7677text.
7678
7679** Font Lock mode
7680
7681*** Global Font Lock mode
7682
7683Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
7684new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
7685font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
7686turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
7687on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
7688
7689For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
7690
7691 (global-font-lock-mode t)
7692
7693in your ~/.emacs.
7694
7695*** Local Refontification
7696
7697In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
7698However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
7699those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
7700command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
7701
7702In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
7703(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
7704current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
7705above and below point.
7706
7707With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
7708
7709** Follow mode
7710
7711Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
7712buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
7713side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
7714they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
7715split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
7716follow-mode.
7717
7718M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
7719
7720To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
7721command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
7722
7723** hide-show changes.
7724
7725The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
7726to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
7727normal hooks.
7728
7729** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
7730The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
7731
7732** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
7733recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
7734those that begin a function, record, or macro.
7735
7736** MSDOS Changes
7737
7738*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
7739Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
7740
7741*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
7742and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
7743
7744*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
7745
7746*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
7747pressing both mouse buttons.
7748
7749*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
7750restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
79214ddf 7751are:
a933dad1
DL
7752
7753**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
7754now works.
7755
7756**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
7757
7758**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
7759implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
7760
7761**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
7762
7763**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
7764
7765**** `M-x recover-session' works.
7766
7767**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
7768
7769**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
7770\f
7771* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
7772
7773** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
7774tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
7775remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
7776this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
7777behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
7778
7779** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
7780
7781The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
7782not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
7783need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
7784be different.
7785
7786It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
7787than `system-type'.
7788
7789See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
7790
7791** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
7792now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
7793
7794** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
7795that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
7796
7797** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
7798no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
7799reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
7800
7801The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
7802to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
7803like this:
7804
7805 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
7806
7807SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
7808It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
7809becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
7810
7811REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
7812seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
7813means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
7814
7815*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
7816up if too much time passes.
7817
7818 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
7819
7820This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
7821If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
7822of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
7823form in BODY.
7824
7825*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
7826a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
7827call looks like this:
7828
7829 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
7830
7831SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
7832runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
7833timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
7834ARGS.
7835
7836Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
7837command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
7838command.
7839
7840REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
7841time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
7842does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
7843each time Emacs becomes idle.
7844
7845If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
7846idle for SECS seconds.
7847
7848*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
7849all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
7850programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
7851instead.
7852
7853*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
7854there is no answer within a certain time.
7855
7856 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
7857
7858asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
7859within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
7860Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
7861
7862** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
7863arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
7864meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
7865arguments in between are ignored.
7866
7867This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
7868the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
7869
7870** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
7871/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
7872/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
7873site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
7874version.
7875
7876It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
7877version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
7878for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
7879has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
7880and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
7881problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
7882
7883** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
7884.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
7885systems with limited file name syntax.
7886
7887Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
7888convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
7889for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
7890completions.el:
7891
7892(defvar save-completions-file-name
7893 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
7894 "*The filename to save completions to.")
7895
7896This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
7897depends on the operating system, because the definition of
7898convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
7899Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
7900MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
7901
7902** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
7903rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
7904minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
7905
7906** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
7907marker from its buffer position.
7908
7909** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
7910Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
7911The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
7912
7913** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
7914that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
7915condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
7916of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
7917matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
7918regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
7919
7920This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
7921errors that happen often during editing.
7922
7923** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
7924into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
7925puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
7926
7927** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
7928now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
7929
7930** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
7931a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
7932name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
7933to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
7934and not get-buffer-window.
7935
7936** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
7937calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
7938being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
7939
7940If you use this feature, you should set the variable
7941buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
7942property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
7943non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
7944are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
7945property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
7946over and over for the same text.
7947
7948** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
7949
7950*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
7951in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
7952
7953;; @(#) HEADER: text
7954;; $HEADER: text $
7955
7956in addition to the normal
7957
7958;; HEADER: text
7959
7960*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
7961checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
7962lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
7963\f
7964* For older news, see the file ONEWS.
7965
7966----------------------------------------------------------------------
7967Copyright information:
7968
404fa7d6 7969Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
7970
7971 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
7972 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
7973 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
7974 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
7975
7976 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
7977 of this document, or of portions of it,
7978 under the above conditions, provided also that they
7979 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
7980\f
7981Local variables:
7982mode: outline
7983paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
7984end: